Siemens Industry Online

Support 1

Safety information 2

Description 3
Industrial Controls
Mounting and dismantling 4
Soft starters and solid-state
switching devices
Connecting 5
SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
Soft Starters
Parameter assignment 6
Equipment Manual

Commissioning 7

Functions 8

Messages and diagnostics 9

Maintenance and service 10

Technical specifications 11

Dimension drawings 12

Circuit diagrams 13

Example circuits A

02/2022
A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage
to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices
referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to
the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may
be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 Copyright © Siemens AG 2018.

Smart Infrastructure Ⓟ 04/2022 Subject to change All rights reserved
Electrical Products
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Siemens Industry Online Support.......................................................................................................... 9

1.1 Support Request ................................................................................................................ 11
1.2 Additional documentation ................................................................................................. 11
2 Safety information............................................................................................................................... 13
2.1 ESD Guidelines................................................................................................................... 13
2.2 Five safety rules for working in or on electrical systems....................................................... 14
2.3 Reactive power compensation............................................................................................ 15
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to IEC 60947-4-2 ....................................... 15
2.5 Security information .......................................................................................................... 16
2.6 ATEX / IECEx....................................................................................................................... 16
2.6.1 Use in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations .................................................................... 16
2.6.2 ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection .................................................................. 16
2.7 Failsafe .............................................................................................................................. 20
2.8 Protection against unauthorized actuation.......................................................................... 22
2.9 Firmware update................................................................................................................ 22
2.10 Recycling and disposal ....................................................................................................... 22
3 Description........................................................................................................................................... 23
3.1 History............................................................................................................................... 23
3.2 Hardware configuration ..................................................................................................... 24
3.3 Operating principle ............................................................................................................ 25
3.4 3RW5 HMI High Feature ..................................................................................................... 28
3.5 Options for accessing the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters...................................... 30
3.6 Operating modes and master control function.................................................................... 32
3.6.1 Operating modes ............................................................................................................... 32
3.6.2 Sets the operating mode .................................................................................................... 35
3.7 Device versions .................................................................................................................. 39
3.8 Areas of application and load types .................................................................................... 43
3.9 Selection of the soft starter using the Simulation Tool for Soft Starters................................ 44
3.10 Structure of the article number .......................................................................................... 44
3.11 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 49
3.11.1 Accessories for 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters...................................................... 49
3.11.2 3RW5 communication module ........................................................................................... 51
3.11.3 SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) ....................................................................................... 51

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 3
Table of contents

4 Mounting and dismantling .................................................................................................................. 55

4.1 Mounting 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters ............................................................. 55
4.2 Mounting the fan cover...................................................................................................... 55
4.3 Mount the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters on a level surface................................. 56
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ......................................... 60
4.4.1 Removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ............................................................................... 60
4.4.2 Installing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter ............. 61
4.4.3 Installing the High Feature 3RW5 HMI on a flat surface ....................................................... 62
4.4.4 Installing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the control cabinet door ....................................... 64
4.4.5 Replacing the hinged cover of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter ............................. 68
5 Connecting .......................................................................................................................................... 71
5.1 Overview of all connections of the 3RW55 soft starter ........................................................ 71
5.2 Overview of all connections of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter............................................ 73
5.3 Connecting 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters........................................................... 74
5.4 Connecting the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to the main circuit connection
(line side/motor side) ......................................................................................................... 75
5.5 Mounting terminal covers on main circuit connections ....................................................... 76
5.6 Replacement of the box terminal blocks with size 2 ............................................................ 78
5.7 Connecting the control terminals (screw terminals) ............................................................ 80
5.8 Disconnecting the control current form the screw-type terminals........................................ 81
5.9 Connecting the control terminals (spring-type terminals).................................................... 82
5.10 Disconnecting the control current from the spring-loaded terminals ................................... 83
5.11 Replacing the control terminals .......................................................................................... 84
5.12 Installing the cover for the control cable duct ..................................................................... 86
5.13 Removing the cover of the control cable duct ..................................................................... 87
6 Parameter assignment......................................................................................................................... 89
6.1 Parameterizing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters ..................................................... 89
6.2 Parameter sets ................................................................................................................... 91
6.3 Application wizard ............................................................................................................. 92
6.4 Suggested settings of the application wizard ...................................................................... 93
6.5 Motor parameters .............................................................................................................. 95
6.6 Design and operator controls of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI .............................................. 98
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ................................................................................. 99
6.8 Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature .................... 117
6.9 Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature................................................... 119
6.10 Parameterizing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ..................................................................... 121
6.11 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series / identically .................. 123

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

4 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Table of contents

6.11.1 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with micro SD card in series /
identically........................................................................................................................ 123
6.11.2 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series / identically with SIRIUS
Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)................................................................................................ 124
7 Commissioning .................................................................................................................................. 125
7.1 Commissioning 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters................................................... 125
7.2 Sealing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters (optional) ............................................... 126
7.3 First commissioning of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI.......................................................... 127
8 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 129
8.1 Start-up ........................................................................................................................... 131
8.1.1 Starting modes ................................................................................................................ 131
8.1.2 Automatic parameterization............................................................................................. 132
8.1.3 Soft starting with voltage ramp ........................................................................................ 134
8.1.4 Soft starting with torque control ...................................................................................... 137
8.1.5 Soft starting with voltage ramp and current limiting......................................................... 140
8.1.6 Soft starting with torque control and current limiting ....................................................... 142
8.1.7 Direct-on-line starting ...................................................................................................... 143
8.1.8 Motor heating.................................................................................................................. 143
8.1.9 Breakaway pulse for startup functions .............................................................................. 144
8.2 Run-down........................................................................................................................ 146
8.2.1 Stopping modes............................................................................................................... 146
8.2.2 Coasting down................................................................................................................. 148
8.2.3 Voltage ramp ................................................................................................................... 149
8.2.4 Torque control ................................................................................................................. 150
8.2.5 Pump stop ....................................................................................................................... 152
8.2.6 DC braking....................................................................................................................... 154
8.2.6.1 DC braking with external braking contactors..................................................................... 154
8.2.6.2 Dynamic DC braking without contactor ............................................................................ 157
8.2.6.3 Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor assembly................................................ 160
8.2.6.4 Sensorless motor standstill detection................................................................................ 162
8.2.6.5 External motor standstill detection ................................................................................... 162
8.2.7 Alternative stopping......................................................................................................... 163
8.3 Motor protection.............................................................................................................. 166
8.3.1 Electronic motor overload protection................................................................................ 166
8.3.2 Temperature sensor ......................................................................................................... 169
8.4 Intrinsic device protection ................................................................................................ 171
8.5 Creep speed..................................................................................................................... 172
8.6 Reset ............................................................................................................................... 173
8.7 Quick-stop ....................................................................................................................... 174
8.8 Condition Monitoring....................................................................................................... 174
8.8.1 Condition Monitoring for plant monitoring ....................................................................... 174
8.8.2 Current monitoring .......................................................................................................... 175
8.8.3 Active power monitoring.................................................................................................. 177
8.8.4 Switching frequency monitoring ...................................................................................... 178
8.8.5 Starting time monitoring.................................................................................................. 181
8.8.6 Pump cleaning function ................................................................................................... 182

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 5
Table of contents

8.9 Asymmetry ...................................................................................................................... 186

8.10 Ground fault .................................................................................................................... 187
8.11 Emergency mode............................................................................................................. 189
8.11.1 Emergency start............................................................................................................... 189
8.11.2 Emergency run ................................................................................................................ 191
8.12 Inputs.............................................................................................................................. 194
8.12.1 Overview of the input functions ....................................................................................... 194
8.12.2 Process data and process images ...................................................................................... 196
8.13 Outputs ........................................................................................................................... 198
8.13.1 Digital outputs ................................................................................................................. 198
8.13.2 Analog output ................................................................................................................. 202
8.13.3 Cyclic send data ............................................................................................................... 205
8.14 ATEX / IECEx..................................................................................................................... 206
8.14.1 ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection ................................................................ 206
8.14.2 Ex operation .................................................................................................................... 207
8.15 Failsafe ............................................................................................................................ 212
8.15.1 Operating principle .......................................................................................................... 212
8.15.2 Resetting safety-related shutoff ........................................................................................ 213
8.16 Functions under "Additional parameters" .......................................................................... 214
8.17 Setting the date and time................................................................................................. 218
8.18 Trace ............................................................................................................................... 220
8.19 Test mode........................................................................................................................ 221
8.19.1 Test with small load ......................................................................................................... 222
8.19.2 Simulation ....................................................................................................................... 224
8.20 Monitoring ...................................................................................................................... 227
8.20.1 Monitoring the measured values of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature............................................................................................................................ 227
8.20.2 Graphical display of measured values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ............................... 229
8.20.3 Monitoring the process image of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature... 231
8.21 Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature.................................................................................. 232
8.22 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 234
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration .................................................. 237
8.23.1 General advice on using PINs ........................................................................................... 237
8.23.2 Local access protection (PIN) ............................................................................................ 237
8.23.2.1 Define PIN........................................................................................................................ 238
8.23.2.2 Change PIN...................................................................................................................... 239
8.23.2.3 Delete PIN........................................................................................................................ 239
8.23.3 Setting up user account management .............................................................................. 240
8.23.4 User login and logout....................................................................................................... 242
8.24 Micro SD card .................................................................................................................. 243
8.25 Reloading a language for the High Feature 3RW5 HMI ...................................................... 245
9 Messages and diagnostics ................................................................................................................. 247
9.1 Diagnostics options.......................................................................................................... 247

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

6 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Table of contents

9.2 LED display ...................................................................................................................... 247

9.2.1 Overview of the device LEDs on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters .................... 247
9.2.2 Status and error displays .................................................................................................. 248
9.2.3 Overview of LEDs on High Feature 3RW5 HMI................................................................... 249
9.3 Warnings and remedial measures of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.............. 250
9.4 Errors and remedial actions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters....................... 252
9.5 Faults and remedial actions of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature............................................... 256
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5
HMI High Feature............................................................................................................. 257
9.7 Execute HMI diagnostics with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature................................................ 263
9.8 Performing diagnostics of the 3RW5 communication module with the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature............................................................................................................................ 263
9.9 Self-test (user-test) .......................................................................................................... 264
9.10 Logbooks......................................................................................................................... 265
9.11 Save service data to micro SD card ................................................................................... 266
10 Maintenance and service .................................................................................................................. 269
10.1 Maintenance and repairs.................................................................................................. 269
10.2 Replacing the fan ............................................................................................................. 269
10.3 Firmware update.............................................................................................................. 275
10.4 Performing firmware update with micro SD card (3RW5 HMI High Feature) ....................... 277
10.5 Restoring factory setting .................................................................................................. 278
10.5.1 Restoring the factory settings via High Feature 3RW5 HMI ................................................ 279
10.5.2 Restoring the factory settings with the Master RESET button via 3RW5 HMI High Feature... 280
10.6 "Device change" function ................................................................................................. 281
10.6.1 Device change with micro SD card on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.................................... 282
10.6.2 Device change with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)....................................................... 283
11 Technical specifications ..................................................................................................................... 285
11.1 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support........................................................... 285
12 Dimension drawings .......................................................................................................................... 287
12.1 CAx data.......................................................................................................................... 287
12.2 Drilling pattern for 3RW5 HMI High Feature ...................................................................... 287
13 Circuit diagrams................................................................................................................................. 289
13.1 CAx data.......................................................................................................................... 289
A Example circuits................................................................................................................................. 291
A.1 Main circuit connection.................................................................................................... 291
A.1.1 Feeder assembly, type of coordination 1 fuseless.............................................................. 291
A.1.2 Feeder assembly, type of coordination 1 with fuses .......................................................... 293
A.1.3 Feeder assembly, type of coordination 2........................................................................... 294
A.1.4 Inside-delta circuit ........................................................................................................... 295

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 7
Table of contents

A.2 Control circuit connection ................................................................................................ 299

A.2.1 Control by PLC ................................................................................................................. 299
A.2.2 Control by switch ............................................................................................................. 300
A.2.3 Actuation of a line contactor ............................................................................................ 302
A.2.4 Connecting the temperature sensor ................................................................................. 303
A.2.5 Connecting the evaluation unit to the analog output ........................................................ 304
A.3 Special applications ......................................................................................................... 305
A.3.1 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters in Ex operation ................................................... 305
A.3.1.1 Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline) in Ex operation ............................................ 305
A.3.1.2 Type of motor connection "inside delta" in Ex operation.................................................... 307
A.3.2 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC braking with one
braking contactor ............................................................................................................ 311
A.3.3 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC braking with 2
braking contactors ........................................................................................................... 313
A.3.4 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit with soft starting, soft stopping and the
additional function "Creep speed"..................................................................................... 315
A.3.5 Control via fieldbus with switchover to manual local operation ......................................... 317
A.3.6 Pump cleaning function ................................................................................................... 318
A.3.6.1 Pump cleaning function with creep speed ........................................................................ 318
A.3.6.2 Pump cleaning function with reversing contactor ............................................................. 320
A.3.7 Reversing duty ................................................................................................................. 322
A.3.8 3RW55 soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter sets .............................................. 323
A.3.9 Soft starter for pole-changing motor with separate windings and 2 parameter sets ........... 328
A.3.10 3RW55 soft starter with direct-on-line starting (DOL) as emergency start .......................... 330
A.3.11 Starting a Dahlander motor .............................................................................................. 331
A.3.12 External bypass ................................................................................................................ 334
A.3.13 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 1 or PL c with a 3SK1 safety relay without the 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter .......................................................................................................... 335
A.3.14 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 3 or PL e with a 3SK1 safety relay without the
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter............................................................................................... 339
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter............................................................................................... 343
A.4.1 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 1 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter..................... 345
A.4.2 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter without
coupling of the digital input DI to the failsafe digital input F-DI ......................................... 347
A.4.3 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with coupling
of the digital input DI to the failsafe digital input F-DI ....................................................... 352
A.4.4 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in
conjunction with bus communication and a safety control................................................ 356
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 359
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 361

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

8 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Siemens Industry Online Support 1
Information and service
At Siemens Industry Online Support you can obtain up-to-date information from our global
support database:
• Product support
• Application examples
• Forum
• mySupport
Link: Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en)

Product support
You can find information and comprehensive know-how covering all aspects of your product
here:
• FAQs
Answers to frequently asked questions
• Manuals/operating instructions
Read online or download, available as PDF or individually configurable.
• Certificates
Clearly sorted according to approving authority, type and country.
• Characteristics
For support in planning and configuring your system.
• Product announcements
The latest information and news concerning our products.
• Downloads
Here you will find updates, service packs, HSPs and much more for your product.
• Application examples
Function blocks, background and system descriptions, performance statements,
demonstration systems, and application examples, clearly explained and represented.
• Technical data
Technical product data for support in planning and implementing your project
Link: Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 9
Siemens Industry Online Support

mySupport
The following functions are available in your personal work area "mySupport":
• Support Request
Search for request number, product or subject
• My filters
With filters, you limit the content of the online support to different focal points.
• My favorites
With favorites you bookmark articles and products that you need frequently.
• My notifications
Your personal mailbox for exchanging information and managing your contacts. You can
compile your own individual newsletter in the "Notifications" section.
• My products
With product lists you can virtually map your control cabinet, your system or your entire
automation project.
• My documentation
Configure your individual documentation from different manuals.
• CAx data
Easy access to CAx data, e.g. 3D models, 2D dimension drawings, EPLAN macros, device
circuit diagrams
• My IBase registrations
Register your Siemens products, systems and software.

Siemens Industry Online Support app

The Siemens Industry Online Support app provides you access to all the device-specific
information available on the Siemens Industry Online Support portal for a particular article
number, such as operating instructions, manuals, data sheets, FAQs etc.
The Siemens Industry Online Support app is available for Android and iOS:

Android iOS

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

10 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Siemens Industry Online Support
1.2 Additional documentation

1.1 Support Request

After you have registered, you can use the Support Request form in the online support to send
your question directly to Technical Support:

Support Request: Internet (https://www.siemens.com/support-request)

1.2 Additional documentation

Manuals / online help

At this point, you will find further manuals and online help that may be of interest to you for your
automation system. They are available to download from the Internet free of charge. You can
create your own individual system documentation in mySupport.
• 3RW5 topic page (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747404)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW50 soft starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
en/view/109753750)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW52 soft starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
en/view/109753751)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109753752)
• Equipment Manuals for the 3RW5 soft starter (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
en/ps/16212/man)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW5 PROFINET communication modules (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109753754)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW5 PROFIBUS communication module (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109753753)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW5 Modbus communication modules (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109753755)
• Equipment Manual for the 3RW5 EtherNet/IP communication module (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109758201)
• Online help for SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)
• Online help for STEP 7
• The EMC Directive 2014/30/EU in practice (http://www.siemens.com/emc-guideline)
• Industrial Control Panels and Electronic Equipment of Industrial Machinery for North
America (http://www.siemens.com/UL508A)
• Control Panels compliant with IEC Standards and European Directives (http://
www.siemens.com/iec60204)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 11
Siemens Industry Online Support
1.2 Additional documentation

Interesting links
• Manuals in Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/
en/ps/man)
• FAQs for soft starters 3RW5 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16212/faq)
• Downloads for soft starters 3RW5 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
16212/dl)
• Catalog IC 10 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747945)
• Product support for STEP 7 (TIA Portal) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/
14672)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

12 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Safety information 2
2.1 ESD Guidelines

ESD
All electronic devices are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their
design, these electronic elements are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any
electrostatic discharge.
The acronym ESD has become the established designation for such electrostatic sensitive
components/devices. This is also the international abbreviation for such devices.
ESD devices are identified by the following symbol:

NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
ESD devices can be destroyed by voltages well below the threshold of human perception. These
static voltages develop when you touch a component or electrical connection of a device
without having drained the static charges present on your body. The damage caused to a device
by overvoltage is usually not immediately evident and is only noticed after an extended period
of operation.

Electrostatic charging
Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings can be
electrostatically charged.
The diagram below shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person
coming into contact with the materials specified in the diagram. These values correspond to
IEC 801-2 specifications.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 13
Safety information
2.2 Five safety rules for working in or on electrical systems

9ROWDJHLQN9

  6\QWKHWLFPDWHULDO

 :RRO

  $QWLVWDWLFPDWHULDOHJZRRGRU
 FRQFUHWH
 






 

 


           5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\LQ

Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge

• Make sure the grounding is good:
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices, ensure that your body, the workplace and
packaging are grounded. In this way, you can avoid becoming electrostatically charged.
• Avoid direct contact:
As a general rule, only touch electrostatic sensitive devices when this is unavoidable (e.g.
during maintenance work). Handle the devices without touching any chip pins or PCB traces.
In this way, the discharged energy cannot reach or damage sensitive devices.
Discharge your body before taking any necessary measurements on a device. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Use only grounded measuring instruments.

2.2 Five safety rules for working in or on electrical systems

A set of rules, which are summarized in DIN VDE 0105 as the "five safety rules", are defined for
working in or on electrical systems as a preventative measure against electrical accidents:
1. Isolate
2. Secure against re-connection
3. Verify absence of operating voltage
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts
These five safety rules must be applied in the above order prior to starting work on an electrical
system. After completing the work, proceed in the reverse order.
It is assumed that every electrically skilled person is familiar with these rules.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

14 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Safety information
2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to IEC 60947-4-2

Explanations
1. The isolating distances between live and de-energized parts of the system must vary
according to the operating voltage that is applied.
"Isolate" refers to the all-pole disconnection of live parts.
All-pole disconnection can be achieved, e.g. by.:
- Switching off the miniature circuit breaker
- Switching off the motor circuit breaker
- Unscrewing fusible links
- Removing LV HRC fuses
2. The feeder must be locked against inadvertent reconnection to ensure that it remains
isolated for the duration of the work. This can be achieved, for instance, by locking the motor
and system circuit breakers in the OFF position or by unscrewing the fuses and using lockable
elements to prevent them from being reinserted.
3. The de-energized state of the equipment should be verified using suitable test equipment,
e.g. a two-pole voltmeter. Single-pole test pins are not suitable for this purpose. The absence
of power must be established for all poles, phase to phase, and phase to N/PE.
4. Grounding and short-circuiting are only mandatory if the system has a nominal voltage
greater than 1 kV. In this case, the system should always be grounded first and then
connected to the live parts to be short-circuited.
5. These parts should be covered, or barriers erected around them, to avoid accidental contact
during the work with adjacent parts that are still live.

2.3 Reactive power compensation

Capacitors for improving the power factor (reactive power compensation)

Do not connect any capacitors to the output terminals of the 3RW5 soft starter. If capacitors are
connected to the output terminals, the 3RW5 soft starter will be damaged.
Do not operate active filters, e.g. for reactive power compensation, parallel to the 3RW5 soft
starter.
If you use capacitors to correct the power factor (actively or passively), you must connect them
on the line side of the 3RW5 soft starter. Make sure that the capacitors do not actively control the
power factor during the starting and coasting down phases. If you use a contactor disconnector
or main contactor together with the 3RW5 soft starter, the capacitors must be disconnected
from the 3RW5 soft starter when the contactor is open.
You will find further information in the Internet (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67131557).

2.4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to IEC 60947-4-2

This product is designed for Environment A. It may produce radio interference in domestic
environments, in which case the user may be required to take adequate mitigation measures.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 15
Safety information
2.6 ATEX / IECEx

2.5 Security information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary
to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security
concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected to
an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only
when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available
and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer
supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber
threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed
under
https://www.siemens.com/cert.

2.6 ATEX / IECEx

2.6.1 Use in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations

The components of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are not suitable for installation
in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations .
Use the device only in a control cabinet with at least degree of protection IP 4x.
If you have any questions, ask your ATEX/IECEx expert.

2.6.2 ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection

Environmental conditions
Comply with the ambient conditions for which the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are
approved.
Note that the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are approved for operation in a
temperature range of -25 °C to +60 °C. Consider the derating of the rated operational current at
ambient temperatures higher than 40 °C. You will find further information on derating in the

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

16 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Safety information
2.6 ATEX / IECEx

Technical specifications (Page 285) in section "Power electronics" or in Catalog IC 10 (https://

support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747945).

Note
Temperature sensor
For ATEX / IECEx-certified motor protection, use of the PTC type A sensor only is approved.

Note
Simulation Tool for Soft Starters
Note that the Simulation Tool for Soft Starters (Page 44) already takes into account the derating
for certain ambient temperatures, when you select a suitable 3RW5 soft starter.

Parameterization of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

You are supported with parameterizing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters for ATEX / IECEx
applications by the menu in the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. Activate the function "Ex application"
(Page 207) to deactivate impermissible settings of the ATEX/IECEx relevant parameters. Set all
relevant parameters in the same menu.

Setting the rated motor operational current

Set the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to the rated operational current of the motor as
stated on the type plate or design test certificate of the motor.

Trip class (electronic overload protection)

Make sure that the motor and the cables are dimensioned for the selected trip class.
The rated data of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters refers to normal starting
(CLASS 10E). For heavy starting (> CLASS 10E) you may have to overdimension the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Parameterizing the motor protection functions (RESET setting)

Note that the "Auto RESET" setting is not permissible when operating motors in Class I and Class
II Hazardous Locations.
If you have activated the function "Ex application" (Page 207), the parameter "Response to
overload" is permanently set to "Turn off without restart".

Short-circuit protection
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters do not include short-circuit protection. Make sure
that short-circuit protection is provided.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 17
Safety information
2.6 ATEX / IECEx

Line protection
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly dimensioning conductor cross
sections. Select a sufficiently large conductor cross section.

Emergency start and emergency run not permissible

If the motor is operated in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations, the functions "emergency
start" (Page 189) and "emergency run" (Page 191) are not permissible.

Cyclic test of the motor protection functions

Note that performing the self-test (user-test) without 3RW5 HMI High Feature results in loss of
the certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx and there will be no explosion
protection.
Only perform the self-test (user-test) (Page 264) locally with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature to
ensure that the correct 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is tested. Only in this way can the
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx be guaranteed.
On 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters in ATEX / IECEx applications, perform the self-test
(user-test) (Page 264) during commissioning and periodically at intervals of no more than
36 months.

Certification of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Note
Firmware versions and product versions of the 3RW55 soft starter with ATEX / IECEx
certification
For 3RW55 soft starters, certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx is only
provided from firmware version V2.0 and product version E02 (does not apply to 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters).
Note that it is not possible to downgrade to a previous firmware version because, in that case,
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx cannot be guaranteed.

The motor overload protection of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters is ATEX / IECEx-
certified to SIL 1.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are approved under Equipment Groups I and II,
Category (2) or (M2) in zones "G" and "D". Zones "G" and "D" are areas in which explosive gas,
vapor, mist or air mixtures and combustible dust are present:
IECEx BVS 19.0014 X [Ex]
BVS 18 ATEX F003 X
II (2)G [Ex eb Gb] [Ex db Gb] [Ex pxb Gb]1)
II (2)D [Ex tb Db] [Ex pxb Db]
I (M2) [Ex db Mb]

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

18 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Safety information
2.6 ATEX / IECEx

1)
For the pxb applications, pressure and flow rate monitoring are additionally required for the
overpressure encapsulation systems.

Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline)

Note that operation of a 3RW55 soft starter in the motor connection type "Standard" without
implementing one of the two following remedial measures for the following line voltages results
in loss of certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx (does not apply to 3RW55
Failsafe soft starters):
• Soft starter 200 - 480 V: for line voltage > 440 V (+10%)
• Soft starter 200 - 600 V: for line voltage > 500 V (+10%)
• Soft starter 200 - 690 V: for line voltage > 560 V (+10%)
Depending on the structure of the circuit, choose one of the following possibilities for ensuring
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx:
• Use an additional line contactor in the main circuit.
Connect the line contactor at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline) in Ex
operation (Page 305).
• For a motor feeder configuration with a circuit breaker, use an additional undervoltage trip
unit.
Connect the undervoltage trip unit at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Connecting (Page 71).
The motor connection type "Automatic detection" is not approved for ATEX/IECEx applications.

Type of motor connection "Inside delta"

Note that operation of a 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with motor connection type
"Inside-delta" without implementing one of the two following remedial measures results in loss
of certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx:
Depending on the structure of the circuit, choose one of the following possibilities for ensuring
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx:
• Use an additional line contactor in the main circuit (in the supply cable or in the delta
connection).
Connect the line contactor at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Type of motor connection "inside delta" in Ex
operation (Page 307).
• For a motor feeder configuration with a circuit breaker, use an additional undervoltage trip
unit.
Connect the undervoltage trip unit at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Connecting (Page 71).
The motor connection type "Automatic detection" is not approved for ATEX/IECEx applications.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 19
Safety information
2.7 Failsafe

Complying with standards

Increased danger in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations means it is necessary to comply with
the following standards carefully:
• IEC / EN 60079-14 / VDE 0165-1: For electrical apparatus for Class I and Class II Hazardous
Locations.
• IEC / EN 60079-17: Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous areas.
• EN 50495: Safety devices required for the safe functioning of equipment with respect to
explosion risks.

ATEX/IECEx-specific safety data

You will find ATEX / IECEx-specific safety data on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters in
the Technical specifications (Page 285).

Maintenance and repairs

The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are maintenance-free. The repair of soft starters
with approval according to IEC 61508 / EN ISO 13849 is only permissible in the manufacturer's
plant.
Any repair to the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters that is not performed in the
manufacturer's plant will result in loss of ATEX/IECEx approval.

Restoration of the factory setting of the 3RW55 soft starter

Restoration of the factory setting of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in active Ex
operation is only permissible via the master RESET button on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. This
resets the parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to the factory settings.
After restoration of the factory settings, you have to parameterize the 3RW55 and 3RW55
Failsafe soft starters again for use in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations.
You will find further information on parameterization of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters for use in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations in chapter Ex operation (Page 207).

2.7 Failsafe

WARNING
Loss of the safety function due to incorrectly set rated operational current Ie.
Can cause death or serious injury.
Using a motor with too low rated operational current Ie can disable error detection
mechanisms. Safety-related shutoff by the safety function "Safe Torque Off" (STO) can no longer
be guaranteed.
Make sure that the rated operational current Ie of the motor is in the range of the settable rated
operational current Ie of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

20 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Safety information
2.7 Failsafe

WARNING
Loss of the safety function due to restricted diagnostics.
Can cause death or serious injury.
For diagnostics, the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must always be directly connected to the main
supply voltage (operational voltage).
For diagnostics, always connect the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter directly to the main supply
voltage (operational voltage). Additional contact elements (e.g. a redundant contactor) must
only be connected in series behind the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

WARNING
Loss of the safety function due to a failed thyristor.
Can cause death or serious injury.
The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is no longer ready for operation if it contains a failed thyristor.
Replace the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter if a thyristor fails.

WARNING
Loss of the safety function due to a short-circuit.
Can cause death or serious injury.
• Short-circuit protection for coordination type 1
The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is defective after a short-circuit.
Replace the defective 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Short-circuit protection for coordination type 2
The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is still fully functional after a short-circuit.
Run the self-test (user-test) (Page 264) to check the safety function before continuing to use
the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Note
Function test
In continuous operation, the key safety values apply in the case of a function test interval for
SIL 1 ≤ 1 year and for SIL 3 ≤ 1 month. The function check is part of the self-test (user-test)
(Page 264).

Note
Safe state
The basis of the safety function is the definition of the safe state. On the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter, the safe state is an open load circuit.

Note
Safety function
With the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, applications can be implemented with the safety function
"Safe Torque Off" (STO) acc. to EN 61800‑5‑2 and stop category 0 acc. to EN 60204‑1.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 21
Safety information
2.10 Recycling and disposal

Maintenance and repairs

The repair of soft starters with approval according to IEC 61508 / EN ISO 13849 is only
permissible in the manufacturer's plant.
Any repair to the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters that is not performed in the manufacturer's plant
will result in loss of Failsafe approval.

2.8 Protection against unauthorized actuation

Protect freely accessible operator controls on your machine / system against unauthorized
actuation if this could result in a risk or danger. Take suitable action in this regard, for example,
a lockable key-operated switch.

2.9 Firmware update

To be able to use 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters without any problem and with their full
range of functions, ensure that all components have the latest firmware (Page 275):
• 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• 3RW5 communication module (accessory)
You will find current downloads and a history of the versions with new features on the
3RW5 topic page (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747404).

2.10 Recycling and disposal

For environmentally friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a company
certified for the disposal of old electrical and/or electronic devices and dispose of the device in
accordance with the regulations in your country.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

22 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Description 3
Target group
The manual is intended for everyone involved in the following tasks:
• Planning and configuring systems
• Installation
• Commissioning
• Service and maintenance

Requirements for use of 3RW5 soft starters

Basic knowledge of the following areas:
• General electrical engineering
• Drive technology
• Automation technology
• Handling the automation system and the software used

3.1 History

Release number New features

06/2018 • Initial release
08/2018 • Revision of the manual
03/2019 • Revision of the manual
• Addition of functions for the 3RW55 soft starter
(e.g. test with small load, reversing DC brake, simulation)
• 3RW55 soft starter size 5
• ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection
11/2019 • Revision of the manual
• Addition of functions for the 3RW55 soft starter
(e.g. emergency run function)
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
04/2020 • Revision of the manual
• Addition of functions for the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.
(e.g. web server and OPC UA server in conjunction with a 3RW5 PROFINET High
Feature communication module)
02/2022 • Revision of the manual

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 23
Description
3.2 Hardware configuration

3.2 Hardware configuration

3RW55 soft starter


 



0


 

 

 

① Main circuit connection (line power supply)

② 3RW5 HMI High Feature
③ Diagnostics LEDs
④ Eye for lead seal
⑤ Main circuit connection (line power supply and motor) size 5
⑥ Slot for 3RW5 communication module (accessory)
⑦ Connectable conductor cross sections
You will also find the conductor cross-sections that can be connected in the Technical specifica‐
tions (Page 285).
⑧ Main circuit connection (motor)
⑨ Control terminals (inputs/outputs)
⑩ Control cable duct with cover

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

24 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.3 Operating principle

3RW55 Failsafe soft starter



)',

)0 

 

① Main circuit connection (line power supply)

② 3RW5 HMI High Feature
③ Diagnostics LEDs
④ Eye for lead seal
⑤ Slot for 3RW5 communication module (accessory)
⑥ Connectable conductor cross sections
You will also find the conductor cross-sections that can be connected in the Technical specifica‐
tions (Page 285).
⑦ Main circuit connection (motor)
⑧ Control terminals (inputs/outputs)
⑨ Control cable duct with cover

3.3 Operating principle

Soft starters are used to start three-phase induction motors with reduced torque and reduced
starting current.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters start the motor as soon as the switch-on command
is issued (t1). During the ramp-up time (t1 to t3), the current is conducted via power
semiconductors (switching elements), which start the motor smoothly.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters feature internal start-up recognition. If the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects a motor start-up before the ramp-up time elapses, the
motor voltage is immediately increased to 100% of the line voltage (t2). The internal bypass
contacts close and the power semiconductors are bypassed. The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter is in bypass mode.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 25
Description
3.3 Operating principle

Canceling the switch-on command (t4) activates the stopping mode and the motor is shut down.
The power semiconductors also ensure that the motor coasts down smoothly to a stop. As long
as the stopping time is active (t4 to t5), power is still supplied to the motor. It may take longer for
the motor to actually coast down to a standstill (t6).

8>9@ Q>PLQ@

 QH

8H 

86

21 W>V@
581
%<3$66('
W W  W W W W

① Speed t5 End of the set stopping time

(t5-t4)
② Voltage t6 Motor at standstill
t1 Motor start-up with set starting voltage US US Set starting voltage
t2 Rated operating speed ne reached Ue Rated operational voltage
t3 End of the set ramp-up time ne Rated operating speed of the motor
(t3-t1)
t4 Switch-on command is canceled, motor is
switched off

Functions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).
• Parameterizable soft starting for a smooth drive start-up
• Parameterizable soft stopping for a smooth drive stop
• Parameterizable current limiting for avoiding current peaks
• Integrated electronic motor overload protection with adjustable trip class (OFF,
CLASS 10A, 10E, 20E, 30E)
• Integrated intrinsic device protection protects the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
from overload
• Extended complete motor protection by means of thermistor motor protection for
connection of a temperature sensor
• Extended operating and diagnostic functions provided by the High Feature 3RW5 HMI
• Analog output for displaying a set measured value using an external evaluation unit
• Automatic parameterization simplifies system commissioning

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

26 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.3 Operating principle

• ATEX/IECEx certification (for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0 and product
version E02, for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters from firmware version V1.0 and product
version E01)
• "Ex application" function supported in parameterization of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters for operation of the motor in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations (for 3RW55
soft starters from firmware version V2.0 and product version E02, for 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters from firmware version V1.0 and product version E01)
• Current limit monitoring with 4 separate limit values
• Monitoring of switching frequency in order to comply with application-dependent waiting/
cooling times
• Condition monitoring for system monitoring
• Parameterizable digital inputs and outputs
• 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters with trace functionality (evaluation via SIRIUS Soft
Starter ES (TIA Portal))
• Connection options of the motor in standard (inline) circuit or in inside-delta circuit
• The emergency start function allows the plant to continue to run in the event of a fault in
the plant
• Phase asymmetry monitoring protects the motor from asymmetrical current consumption
• Pump cleaning function for removing blockages and dirt from water pipes, filters, and
pump blades
• Pump stopping mode for reduced mechanical loads and optimum control of pump stopping
• Breakaway pulse for overcoming high stiction, e.g. in mills
• Access protection by PIN and user accounts
• Micro SD card for saving data
• Optional 3RW5 communication module for integration into bus systems
• PROFIenergy: Energy-saving functions due to stand-by mode and energy saving while
idle (for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
from firmware version V1.0 combined with a 3RW5 PROFINET communication module
(accessory))
• Application wizard supports the commissioning of various applications
• Parameter set change for applications with different load conditions
• Cascade connection for connecting the output of a 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter to
the input of further soft starters
• Serial starting can switch on and off as many as 3 different motors one after the other
• Web server (for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.1.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters with firmware version higher than V1.0.0 combined with a 3RW5 PROFINET High
Feature communication module from firmware version V2.0 (accessory))
• OPC UA server (for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.1.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters with firmware version higher than V1.0.0 combined with a 3RW5 PROFINET High
Feature communication module from firmware version V2.0 (accessory))

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 27
Description
3.4 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Further functions of the 3RW55 soft starters

• The emergency run function permits continued operation if a power semiconductor fails
(from firmware version V2.1)
• Motor heating for minimizing condensation inside the motor for drives outdoors
• Creep speed function in applications with a low counter-torque, e.g. positioning of machine
tools
• DC braking

Further functions of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

• Implementation of applications with the safety function "Safe Torque Off" (STO) and stop
category 0 up to integrity level SIL 3 combined with the following inputs and outputs:
– Failsafe digital input F‑DI (not parameterizable)
– Failsafe signaling output F‑RQ (not parameterizable)

Additional information
You will find an overview of all of the functions of the 3RW5 soft starter in the Catalog IC 10
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747945).
You will find further details of the functions in chapter Functions (Page 129).

3.4 3RW5 HMI High Feature

You can use the 3RW5 HMI High Feature to parameterize, monitor and control the 3RW55
and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters. You can remove the 3RW5 HMI High Feature from the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and mount it in the control cabinet door or on a wall using
accessories. It can be connected to the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES software (TIA Portal) via the local
interface. The 3RW5 HMI High Feature has a TFT color display, LEDs for the status display, and
function and control keys.

Functions
• Configurable function selection key F1-F9
• Configurable start key

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

28 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.4 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Language selection
• Starting and stopping the motor via control keys
• Local interface
• Display of error diagnoses as plain-text messages
• Display of up to 5 measured values at the same time
• Setting communication parameters of 3RW5 communication modules:
– PROFINET standard (device name, IP parameters and other communication parameters)
– PROFINET High Feature (device name, IP parameters and other communication
parameters)
– PROFIBUS (station address and other communication parameters)
– Modbus TCP (IP parameters and other communication parameters)
– Modbus RTU (station address and other communication parameters)
– EtherNet/IP (IP parameters and other communication parameters)
• Backup of parameterization data on a micro SD card
• The display of the device LEDs of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature shows the messages of the
following devices:
– 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
– 3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Communication module (if there is one)
• Firmware updates can be performed using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and a micro SD card
for the following devices:
– 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
– 3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Communication module (if there is one)
Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 29
Description
3.5 Options for accessing the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

3.5 Options for accessing the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

 


67(3
6,5,86 

 

:(% 23&8$







6,5,86

① SIRIUS 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (illustration similar)

② 3RW5 HMI High Feature
③ LED display on 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
④ PC with web client via an optional 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module from
firmware version V2.0
⑤ PC with OPC UA client via an optional 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module from
firmware version V2.0
⑥ PC or programming device with configuration software of the controller, e.g. STEP 7
⑦ Programmable logic controller, e.g. SIMATIC S7‑1500
⑧ Fieldbus (via optional 3RW5 communication module)
⑨ PC with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional via an optional 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module
⑩ Motor
⑪ PC with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via local interface on 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Options for data transfer

Monitoring Diagnosis Control Parameter setting

3RW5 HMI High Feature ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)1)
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Fieldbus via 3RW5 communica‐ ✓ (via user program) ✓ ✓ ✓
tion module

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

30 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.5 Options for accessing the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Monitoring Diagnosis Control Parameter setting

3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft LEDs LEDs Via digital inputs -
starters
Web server2) ✓ ✓ ✓3) -
OPC UA server2) ✓ ✓ - -
1)
Via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature or via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module
2)
Only via an optional 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module from firmware version V2.0
3)
Login necessary with "Operating personnel" or "Service personnel" user role

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 31
Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

3.6 Operating modes and master control function

3.6.1 Operating modes

Control source and location of control

The operating modes assign access rights to the various control sources (access sources). The
control source that possesses the rights for controlling and writing access has control. As only
one control source can ever have control at one time, different priorities are assigned to the
modes. Read access is also possible without control.


6,5,86


:(%



6,5,86
 

① Control source: 3RW5 HMI High Feature, operating mode: Manual operation local - HMI controlled
② Control source: Web server, operating mode: Manual operation bus - web server controlled
(in combination with 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module from firmware ver‐
sion V2.0)
③ Control source: PLC, operating mode: Automatic
④ Control source: Modbus client or Modbus master, operating mode: Automatic
⑤ Control source: SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional, operating mode: Man‐
ual operation bus - PC controlled
⑥ Control source: Digital inputs, operating mode: Manual operation local - Input controlled or Au‐
tomatic operation - Input controlled
⑦ Control source: SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal), operating mode: Manual operation local - PC
controlled

"Automatic" mode
For the "Automatic" mode you require a 3RW5 communication module and a higher-level control
(e.g. PLC). The control source is connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter via the
3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

32 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

In "Automatic" mode, control is with a higher-level control:

• PROFINET, PROFIBUS, EtherNet/IP: Programmable logic controller (PLC)
• Modbus TCP: Modbus Client (e.g. PLC)
• Modbus RTU: Modbus Master (e.g. PLC)

Note
"Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode
The "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode is available for the 3RW55 soft starter from
firmware version V2.1 and the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with firmware version higher that
V1.0.0 if the digital inputs have master control by activating the "Manual operation local - Input
controlled" bit in the process image output (PIQ). The PLC can regain master control at any time.

Operating mode "Manual - bus"

For operating mode "Manual - bus", you require a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication
module and a PC with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional or a web client.
The control source is connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter via the
3RW5 communication module.
In operating mode "Manual - bus", a control source on the fieldbus has master control:
• SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional
• Web server
(in combination with 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module from firmware
version V2.0)

Operating mode "Manual - local"

In operating mode "Manual - local", master control is with a control source directly on the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter:
• Digital inputs
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Priorities of the operating modes

Mode Control source Priority

Automatic - Higher-level control (e.g. PLC) Lowest
Input controlled1)
Digital inputs
2)
↓
Manual operation bus - Connection abort3) ↓
(depending on the PC controlled SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional ↓
3RW5 communication
module) Web server controlled4)
Web server

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 33
Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

Mode Control source Priority

Manual operation local - Connection abort3) ↓5)
(depending on the parameterization)
Input controlled Digital inputs6) ↓5)
3RW5 HMI controlled 3RW5 HMI High Feature ↓
PC controlled SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Highest
1)
Supported by 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with firmware version higher
than V1.0.0
2)
Not possible for 3RW55 soft starters with firmware version earlier than V2.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters with firmware
version V1.0.0. For 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters with firmware version
higher than V1.0.0 if the digital inputs have master control by activating the "Manual operation local - Input controlled" bit
in the process image output (PIQ). The PLC can regain master control at any time.
3)
Explanation in text below
4)
In combination with 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module from firmware version V2.0
5)
Lowest priority without 3RW5 communication module, explanation in the following text
6)
Possible for 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters. For 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.1 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters with firmware version higher than V1.0.0 only if the input action "Operating mode manual - local" has been
parameterized and activated.

Connection abort
On failure of the bus connection or a CPU stop, the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
behave as set in the parameter "Response to CPU/Master Stop" irrespective of the mode.
If other connections between the control source and 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter are
aborted, master control automatically switches back to the lowest priority of the current
operating mode.
• "Automatic" mode: The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters behave as set in the
parameter "Response to CPU/Master Stop".
• Operating mode "Manual - bus": Control switches to "Manual - bus ‑ Connection abort".
• Operating mode "Manual - local": Control switches either to "Manual - local ‑ Connection
abort" or to "Manual operation local ‑ Input controlled". For certain parameter assignments,
"Manual - local ‑ Connection abort" is not possible. In the following cases, control switches to
"Manual operation local ‑ Input controlled":
– Input action "Operating mode manual - local" is parameterized and activated.
Example: The 3RW5 HMI High Feature has control. Input 2 is assigned the input action
"Operating mode manual - local" and the input action is activated. On a connection abort
terminating the connection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, control switches to "Manual -
local ‑ input controlled".

Additional information
You will find more information on the 3RW5 communication modules in the manual for the
3RW5 communication module in question.
You will find further information about operation on failure of the bus connection to the control
in the manual for the 3RW5 communication module in question.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

34 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

3.6.2 Sets the operating mode

Basic behavior when the operating mode is changed

A higher-priority mode can fetch control from a lower-priority mode at any time; the reverse is
not possible. Control can only be given back to the mode with the lowest priority. Control sources
with higher priority must fetch control from the mode with the lowest priority.

Requirements
• A mode with lower priority can only take control back while the motor is switched off.
• For the "Automatic" mode and operating mode "Manual - bus", you require a
3RW5 communication module.

"Automatic" mode
Note that the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters switch to "Automatic" mode after the
3RW5 communication module has been installed in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Receiving control
"Automatic" mode receives control from the operating mode "Manual - bus" or "Manual - local"
as follows:
• Command in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (fieldbus)
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Release Control"
• Command in the web server
Web page "Control Panel" > "Master Control > Release Control"
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is parameterized: By deactivating the
input action "Operating mode manual - local".
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is not parameterized: By deactivating the
"Manual operation local - Input controlled" bit in the process image output (PIQ) or in the data
table "Process image output (PIQ)" (depending on the 3RW5 communication module),
"Automatic" mode receives master control from the digital inputs.
• Action "LOCAL/REMOTE" on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• Command in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) (local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature)
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Release Control"

Withdrawal of control by other control sources

In "Automatic" mode, master control can be withdrawn by any control source.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 35
Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

Operating mode "Manual bus - PC controlled"

Fetching control
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional actively fetches master control from the
"Automatic" mode or "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode in response to a command
to this effect.
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"

Note
Fetching master control from "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode
The "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode is possible for the following 3RW5 soft
starters:
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with firmware version higher than V1.0.0

Giving back control

SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional actively passes master control to
"Automatic" mode in response to a command to this effect.
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Release Control"

Withdrawal of control by other control sources

Master control is withdrawn from the operating mode "Manual operation bus - PC controlled" by
the operating mode "Manual - local" as follows:
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is not parameterized: By activating the
"Manual operation local - Input controlled" bit in the process image output (PIQ) or in the data
table "Process image output (PIQ)" (depending on the 3RW5 communication module).
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is parameterized: By activating the input
action "Operating mode manual - local".
• Action "LOCAL/REMOTE" on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• Command in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) (local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature)
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"

Operating mode "Manual operation bus - web server controlled"

Fetching control
The web server actively fetches master control from the "Automatic" mode or "Automatic
operation - Input controlled" mode in response to a command to this effect.
Web page "Control Panel" > "Master Control > Get Control"

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

36 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

Giving back control

The web server actively passes master control to "Automatic" mode in response to a command
to this effect.
Web page "Control Panel" > "Master Control > Release Control"

Withdrawal of control by other control sources

Master control is withdrawn from the operating mode "Manual operation bus - web server
controlled" by the operating mode "Manual - local" as follows:
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is not parameterized: By activating the
"Manual operation local - Input controlled" bit in the process image output (PIQ) or in the data
table "Process image output (PIQ)" (depending on the 3RW5 communication module).
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is parameterized: By activating the input
action "Operating mode manual - local".
• "LOCAL / REMOTE" action on the 3RW5 HMI
• Command in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) (local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature)
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"

"Manual operation local - Input controlled" and "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode

Fetching control
The digital inputs receive control from "Automatic" mode or operating mode "Manual - bus" as
follows:
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is not parameterized: By activating the
"Manual operation local - Input controlled" bit in the process image output (PIQ) or in the data
table "Process image output (PIQ)" (depending on the 3RW5 communication module).
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is parameterized: By activating the input
action "Operating mode manual - local".
If control is with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature or with the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (higher priority), you must actively give back control beforehand. The digital inputs can
then fetch control.

Giving back control

"Automatic" mode receives control as follows:
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is not parameterized: By deactivating the
"Manual operation local - Input controlled" bit in the process image output (PIQ) or in the data
table "Process image output (PIQ)" (depending on the 3RW5 communication module)
• If the input action "Operating mode manual - local" is parameterized: By deactivating the
input action "Operating mode manual - local".

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 37
Description
3.6 Operating modes and master control function

Withdrawal of control by other control sources

Control is withdrawn from the digital inputs as follows:
• Command in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (fieldbus)
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"
Note
Fetching master control from "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode
The "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode is possible for the following 3RW5 soft
starters:
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with firmware version higher than V1.0.0

• Command in the web server

Web page "Control Panel" > "Master Control > Get Control"
Note
Fetching master control from "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode
The "Automatic operation - Input controlled" mode is possible for the following 3RW5 soft
starters:
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with firmware version higher than V1.0.0

• Action "LOCAL/REMOTE" on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Command in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) (local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature)
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"

Operating mode "Manual operation local - HMI controlled"

Fetching control
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature actively fetches control with the action "LOCAL/REMOTE" from the
lower priority control source.
If control is with the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (higher priority), you must
actively give back control beforehand in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal). You can then fetch
control with the action "LOCAL/REMOTE".

Giving back control

The 3RW5 HMI High Feature actively gives back control with the action "LOCAL/REMOTE" either
to "Automatic" mode or to the digital inputs. If no 3RW5 communication module is installed in
the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, control is given back to the digital inputs.

Withdrawal of control by other control sources

Control is fetched from the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in response to a command to this effect in
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) at the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

38 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.7 Device versions

Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"

Operating mode "Manual operation local - PC controlled"

Fetching control
In response to a command to this effect, SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) actively fetches
control from any control source.
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Get Control"

Giving back control

In response to a command to this effect, SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) actively gives back
control either to "Automatic" mode or to the digital inputs. If no 3RW5 communication module
is installed in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, master control is given back to the digital
inputs.
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel > Master
Control > Release Control"

Withdrawal of control by other control sources

Control cannot be withdrawn from SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) by any control source.

Additional information
You will find more information on the process images and data tables in the manual for the
respective 3RW5 communication module.
Further information on the operation of SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) can be found in the
online help of SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).

3.7 Device versions

Size 1
3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 39
Description
3.7 Device versions

Size 2
3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe

Size 3
3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe

Size 4
3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

40 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.7 Device versions

Size 5
3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe
-

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 41
Description
3.7 Device versions

Rated operational current ranges

The stated values apply to a rated operational voltage of Ue = 400 V in a standard (inline) circuit.



 
  





 
 
 
 
  

 
 
 
 
,H>$@  

 

 

 








                      
3>N:@

Size 1

Size 2

Size 3

Size 4

Size 5

Ie Rated operational current

P Rated power

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

42 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.8 Areas of application and load types

3.8 Areas of application and load types

Conveyor belts Roller conveyors Compressors

Small/large fans Pumps Hydraulic pumps

Agitators Centrifuges Milling machines

Mills Crushers Circular saws/band saws

Starting of a motor causes a rapid change in the load current. The resulting torque impulses
place severe stresses on the mechanical parts of a machine or plant. Moreover, voltage dips can
occur in the power supply system which can have a negative influence on other devices:
• Flicker in lights
• Influence on computer systems
• Contactors and relays dropping out
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters control the voltage continuously. The torque and
the current are thus also increased continuously. The power supply system is safeguarded
against peak loads and the drive train is protected against damage:
• Smooth starting/stopping, e.g. for conveyor belts
• No pressure surges, e.g. for pumps
• Increased service life of the pipe system, e.g. for compressors
• Reduced starting current, e.g. for agitators
• Reduced stress on gearbox and V belt, e.g. for saws

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 43
Description
3.10 Structure of the article number

3.9 Selection of the soft starter using the Simulation Tool for Soft
Starters

The soft starter can be configured with the STS (Simulation Tool for Soft Starters) software. The
STS suggests suitable soft starters for the respective application based on the entered motor and
load data and application requirements, as well as providing information on the
parameterization.
You can download the Simulation Tool for Soft Starters (STS) for free on the 3RW5 topic page
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747404).

3.10 Structure of the article number

Information on the rated operational current (derating)

Note that the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are approved for operation in a
temperature range of -25 °C to +60 °C. Consider the derating of the rated operational current at
ambient temperatures higher than 40 °C. You will find further information on derating in
the Technical specifications (Page 285) in section "Power electronics" or in Catalog IC 10 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747945).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

44 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.10 Structure of the article number

3RW55 soft starter

Digit of the article number 1st-4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
SIRIUS 3RW soft starter 3RW5 5 H A x***1)
Size of the 3RW55 soft starter x*1)
Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 soft starter x**1)
Connection system • Applies to sizes 1 / 2 1
• Main circuit: Screw terminals
• Control circuit: Screw terminals
• Applies to sizes 3 / 4 / 5 2
• Main circuit: Bus connection
• Control circuit: Spring-loaded terminals
• Applies to sizes 1 / 2 3
• Main circuit: Screw terminals
• Control circuit: Spring-loaded terminals
• Applies to sizes 3 / 4 / 5 6
• Main circuit: Bus connection
• Control circuit: Screw terminals
Rated control supply voltage U s
2)
24 V AC/DC 0
110 - 250 V AC 1
Rated operational voltage Ue 200 - 480 V AC 4
200 - 600 V AC 5
200 - 690 V AC 6
1)
Explanation in the following table.
2)
When rating the control supply voltage, pay attention to the maximum starting current when closing the bypass contacts;
details can be found in the technical data.
The following table shows the size and rated operational current Ie for Ue = 400 V and TU = 40 °C
in a standard (inline) circuit:

Size Rated operational current Ie of Rated operating power Pe of the x* x** x***
the 3RW55 soft starter 3RW55 soft starter
Size 1 Ie = 13 A Pe = 5.5 kW 1 3 4/5
Ie = 18 A Pe = 7.5 kW 1 4
Ie = 25 A Pe = 11 kW 1 5
Ie = 32 A Pe = 15 kW 1 6
Ie = 38 A Pe = 18.5 kW 1 7

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 45
Description
3.10 Structure of the article number

Size 2 Ie = 25 A Pe = 11 kW 2 1 6
Ie = 47 A Pe = 22 kW 2 4 4/6
Ie = 63 A Pe = 30 kW 2 5
Ie = 77 A Pe = 37 kW 2 6
Ie = 93 A Pe = 45 kW 2 7
Size 3 Ie = 113 A Pe = 55 kW 3 4
Ie = 143 A Pe = 75 kW 3 5
Ie = 171 A Pe = 90 kW 3 6
Size 4 Ie = 210 A Pe = 110 kW 4 3
Ie = 250 A Pe = 132 kW 4 4
Ie = 315 A Pe = 160 kW 4 5
Ie = 370 A Pe = 200 kW 4 6
Ie = 470 A Pe = 250 kW 4 7
Ie = 570 A Pe = 315 kW 4 8
Size 5 Ie = 630 A Pe = 355 kW 5 2
Ie = 720 A Pe = 400 kW 5 3
Ie = 840 A Pe = 450 kW 5 4
Ie = 1 100 A Pe = 560 kW 5 6
Ie = 1 280 A Pe = 710 kW 5 8

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

46 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.10 Structure of the article number

3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Digit of the article number 1st-4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th
SIRIUS 3RW soft starter 3RW5 5 H F
Size of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter x*1)

Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter x**1)

Connection system • Applies to sizes 1/2 1
• Main circuit: Screw terminals
• Control circuit: Screw terminals
• Applies to sizes 3/4 2
• Main circuit: Bus connection
• Control circuit: Spring-loaded terminals
• Applies to sizes 1/2 3
• Main circuit: Screw terminals
• Control circuit: Spring-loaded terminals
• Applies to sizes 3/4 6
• Main circuit: Bus connection
• Control circuit: Screw terminals
Rated control supply voltage Us 2)
24 V AC/DC 0
110 - 250 V AC 1
Rated operational voltage Ue 200 - 480 V AC 4
1)
Explanation in the following table.
2)
When rating the control supply voltage, pay attention to the maximum starting current when closing the bypass contacts;
details can be found in the technical data.
The following table shows the size and rated operational current Ie for Ue = 400 V and TU = 40 °C
in a standard (inline) circuit:

Size Rated operational current Ie of Rated operating power Pe of the 3RW55 x* x**
the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter Failsafe soft starter
Size 1 Ie = 13 A Pe = 5.5 kW 1 3
Ie = 18 A Pe = 7.5 kW 1 4
Ie = 25 A Pe = 11 kW 1 5
Ie = 32 A Pe = 15 kW 1 6
Ie = 38 A Pe = 18.5 kW 1 7
Size 2 Ie = 47 A Pe = 22 kW 2 4
Ie = 63 A Pe = 30 kW 2 5
Ie = 77 A Pe = 37 kW 2 6
Ie = 93 A Pe = 45 kW 2 7
Size 3 Ie = 113 A Pe = 55 kW 3 4
Ie = 143 A Pe = 75 kW 3 5
Ie = 171 A Pe = 90 kW 3 6

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 47
Description
3.10 Structure of the article number

Size 4 Ie = 210 A Pe = 110 kW 4 3

Ie = 250 A Pe = 132 kW 4 4
Ie = 315 A Pe = 160 kW 4 5
Ie = 370 A Pe = 200 kW 4 6
Ie = 470 A Pe = 250 kW 4 7
Ie = 570 A Pe = 315 kW 4 8

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

48 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.11 Accessories

3.11 Accessories

3.11.1 Accessories for 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

 

,&BD


 

① 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (illustration similar)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 49
Description
3.11 Accessories

② 3RW5 communication modules:

• PROFIBUS (3RW5980-0CP00)
(from firmware version V1.0.1)
• PROFINET standard (3RW5980-0CS00)
(from firmware version V1.0.1)
• PROFINET High Feature (3RW5950-0CH00)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0)
(from firmware version V1.1 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
• Modbus TCP (3RW5980-0CT00)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters)
(from firmware version V1.1 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
• Modbus RTU (3RW5980-0CR00)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
• EtherNet/IP (3RW5980-0CE00)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
③ Hinged cover (3RW5950-0GL20)
④ Fan cover:
• Sizes 1, 2 and 3 (3RW5983-0FC00)
• Size 4 (3RW5984-0FC00)
• Size 5 (3RW5985-0FC00)
⑤ Terminal cover, top and bottom:
• Sizes 2 and 3 (3RW5983-0TC20)
• Size 4 (3RW5984-0TC20)
⑥ Push-in lugs for wall mounting (3ZY1311-0AA00)
⑦ IP65 door mounting kit (3RW5980-0HD00)
⑧ HMI connecting cable:
• 0.1 m (3UF7931-0AA00-0)
• 0.5 m (3UF7932-0BA00-0)
• 1 m (3UF7937-0BA00-0)
• 2.5 m (3UF7933-0BA00-0)
• 5 m (3RW5980-0HC60)

Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

50 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.11 Accessories

3.11.2 3RW5 communication module

The following 3RW5 communication modules are available for integration of the 3RW55 and
3RW55 Failsafe soft starters in fieldbus systems:

     

① 3RW5 PROFIBUS communication module

(from firmware version V1.0.1)
② 3RW5 PROFINET standard communication module
(from firmware version V1.0.1)
③ 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0)
(from firmware version V1.1 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
④ 3RW5 Modbus TCP communication module
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters)
(from firmware version V1.1 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
⑤ 3RW5 Modbus RTU communication module
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)
⑥ 3RW5 EtherNet/IP communication module
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0)
(from firmware version V1.0 for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters)

Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).

Integration into the automation software

The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters can be integrated in an automation software, e.g.
STEP 7 (TIA Portal) via GSD or GSDML/HSP.
You will find further information on operation of the 3RW5 communication module in the
manual (Page 11) for the respective 3RW5 communication module.

3.11.3 SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)

SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) as of V15 Update 2 is the central software for configuring,
commissioning, operation, and diagnostics of 3RW5 soft starters. Depending on the firmware,
3RW55 soft starters are supported as of V15 Update 2, 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters as of V15.1
Update 2.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 51
Description
3.11 Accessories

You connect your PC or programming device to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter via the
local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. With the Premium or Professional license, you can
also connect your PC or your programming device from a central point to the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module (accessory).
By displaying all operating data, service data and diagnostic data, SIRIUS Soft Starter ES
(TIA Portal) provides reliable information, which helps you to avoid faults, or quickly locate and
eliminate faults if they occur.

Illustration similar

Download
You can download SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the following link (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/24231/dl).

Available versions for V15 and V15.1

Supported functions SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)

(V15.1) Basic Standard Premium
Access via local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High x x x
Feature
Parameter setting x x x
Operator control x x x
Diagnosis x x x
Expert list - x x
Parameter comparison - x x

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

52 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Description
3.11 Accessories

Supported functions SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)

(V15.1) Basic Standard Premium
Service data (maximum pointer, statistic data) - x x
Trace - x x
Access via PROFIBUS or PROFINET - - x
Teleservice via MPI - - x
Routing - - x
Bulk engineering (group function) - - x

Versions available as of V16

Supported functions SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)

Basic Professional1)
Access via local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature x x
Parameter setting x x
Operator control x x
Diagnosis x x
Expert list - x
Parameter comparison - x
Service data (maximum pointer, statistic data) - x
Trace - x
Access via PROFIBUS or PROFINET - x
Teleservice via MPI - x
Routing - x
Bulk engineering (group function) - x
1)
The "Professional" variant corresponds to the "Premium" version of V15.1

Additional information
You will find further information on SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) and necessary versions and
updates in Catalog IC 10 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747945)
and on the 3RW5 topic page (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109747404).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 53
Description
3.11 Accessories

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

54 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Mounting and dismantling 4
4.1 Mounting 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Procedure
1. Optionally mount the fan cover (Page 55).
2. Mount the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter on a level surface (Page 56).
Ensure that the permissible temperature range and the necessary clearances are complied
with.
Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support (Page 285)
3. You also have the option of mounting the 3RW5 communication module (accessory).
You will find further information in the manual for the 3RW5 communication module in
question.

Result
You have mounted the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and can now connect it.
You can remove the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and install it in a control cabinet door, for example.
You can proceed as follows:
• Removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 60)
• Installing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the control cabinet door (Page 64)
• Installing the High Feature 3RW5 HMI on a flat surface (Page 62)

4.2 Mounting the fan cover

Requirements
• Screwdriver T20
• Fan cover (accessory) suitable for the size

Size Article number of the 3RW55 or Article number of the Number of required fan covers
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter fan cover
Size 1 3RW551.-..... 3RW5983-0FC00 1
Size 2 3RW552.-..... 2
Size 3 3RW553.-..... 2
Size 4 3RW554.-..... 3RW5984-0FC00 1
Size 5 3RW555.-..... 3RW5985-0FC00 3

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 55
Mounting and dismantling
4.3 Mount the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters on a level surface

Procedure

NOTICE
Material damage due to mechanical load.
Avoid a mechanical load on the fan hub when mounting the fan cover.


[
1P

• Place the fan cover on the fan ① and fasten the fan cover ②.
– Size 1: You require 1 fan cover and 4 of the screws packed with the product.
– Sizes 2 and 3: You require 2 fan covers. Due to the design, 3 screws packed with the
product are sufficient in each case.
– Size 4: You require 1 fan cover and 4 of the screws packed with the product.
– Size 5: You require 3 fan covers and, for each of these, 4 of the screws packed with the
product.

Result
The fan cover provides enhanced touch protection and prevents the fan from being blocked by
foreign objects.

4.3 Mount the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters on a level
surface

Requirements
• Comply with the mounting positions and ambient conditions stated on the data sheet.
• Comply with the minimum clearances indicated in the following diagram.
• Level surface, e.g. sufficiently strong mounting plate
• 4 properly executed drill holes with thread or plug on the level surface.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

56 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.3 Mount the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters on a level surface

• 4 screws of suitable size and with regular thread for insertion into the selected mounting
plate or wall.
Use an additional 4 washers if the head of the screw is smaller than the specified diameter.
• Screwdriver (depending on the drive of the screws)
• If necessary, use shims and snap rings.
• For size 5, mounting with a crane (optional): Crane load attachment with 4 hooks

Size Article No. Screws Tightening torque

Size 1 3RW551.-..... M6 5 Nm
Size 2 3RW552.-.....
Size 3 3RW553.-.....
Size 4 3RW554.-..... M8 8 Nm
Size 5 3RW555.-..... M12 35 Nm

The following diagram shows the minimum clearances for the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters:

PP

PP PP PP

5:

PP

Procedure for sizes 1 to 4

CAUTION
Heavy device
Device can cause injury if it falls.
Always ask a second person to help you transport, install and remove a heavy device. Use
suitable lifting equipment and wear personnel protective equipment.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 57
Mounting and dismantling
4.3 Mount the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters on a level surface

PP
5:
[  5:
5:


PP
5:

 [


Illustration similar

• Screw the lower 2 screws into the mounting plate ①. Ensure that both screws protrude by
at least 1.5 cm (at least 2 cm for size 4) and then place the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter onto the 2 lower screws ② from above.
• Tilt the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter up so that it is resting level against the mounting
plate ③ and tighten all 4 screws with the specified torque ④.

Procedure for size 5

CAUTION
Heavy device
Device can cause injury if it falls.
Always ask a second person to help you transport, install and remove a heavy device. Use
suitable lifting equipment and wear personnel protective equipment.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

58 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.3 Mount the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters on a level surface


 PP
 5:
[

 

 [







Illustration similar

Installation without a crane

• Remove the terminal cover ⑧ that is plugged in on the top and mount it after the 3RW55 soft
starter has been mounted completely (Page 76).
• Screw the lower 2 screws into the mounting plate ①.
• Ensure that both screws protrude at least 4 cm and then place the 3RW55 soft starter onto
the 2 lower screws ② from above using the handles ⑤ provided (2 people).
• Tilt the 3RW55 soft starter up so that it is resting level against the mounting plate ③ and
tighten all 4 screws with the specified torque ④.

Installation with a crane

• Remove the terminal cover ⑧ that is plugged in on the top and mount it after the 3RW55 soft
starter has been mounted completely (Page 76).
• Screw the lower 2 screws into the mounting plate ①. Make sure that both screws are
protruding at least 4 cm.
• Use a crane load attachment with 4 hooks to lift the 3RW55 soft starter out of the packaging.
Attach the hooks of the crane load attachment to the cutouts ⑥ and ⑦. Lift the 3RW55 soft
starter horizontally out of the packaging and set the 3RW55 soft starter down on a horizontal
surface.
• Use a crane load attachment with 2 hooks to mount the 3RW55 soft starter. Attach the hooks
of the crane load attachment to the cutouts ⑥.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 59
Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Place the 3RW55 soft starter onto the 2 lower screws ② from above with the crane.
• Tilt the 3RW55 soft starter up so that it is resting level against the mounting plate ③ and
tighten all 4 screws with the specified torque ④.

Result
You have mounted the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter on a level surface and can
now connect (Page 74) it.

4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

4.4.1 Removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Requirements
• Flat-bladed screwdriver

Procedure

NOTICE
Damage to sealing surfaces
Make sure that the sealing surfaces are not damaged by the screwdriver.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

60 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature




Illustration similar

• Release the 3RW5 HMI High Feature using a flat-bladed screwdriver in the groove
provided ① / ②.
• Pull the 3RW5 HMI High Feature far enough out of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter ③ to gain access to the HMI connecting cable.
• Unfasten the retaining elements of the HMI connecting cable ④ and pull the HMI connecting
cable out of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter ⑤.

Result
You have removed the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. You can install the 3RW5 HMI High Feature on
a level surface (Page 62) or in a cabinet door (Page 64) or you can install a new 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 61).

4.4.2 Installing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• HMI connecting cable, 0.1 m (accessories)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 61
Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Procedure

NOTICE
Damage caused by electrostatic charge
Note the information in chapter ESD Guidelines (Page 13).





Illustration similar

• Observe the coding of the plug and socket ① / ③.

• Lock the connector in the socket ②.
• Observe the cable routing:
– ① Cable routing to the right
– ③ Cable routing to the left

Result
You have installed the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and
can commission (Page 127) it.

4.4.3 Installing the High Feature 3RW5 HMI on a flat surface

Requirements
• Note the mounting positions, minimum clearances and ambient conditions stated on the
data sheet.
• Removed 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 60)
• Level surface, e.g. sufficiently strong mounting plate

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

62 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• 2 properly executed drill holes with thread or plugs on the level surface. Refer to the drilling
pattern (Page 287).
• 2 head screws M4 x 12 DIN ISO 7045 to fit the drill-holes
• Screwdriver (depending on the drive of the screws)
• 2 push-in lugs (accessories) for wall mounting
• HMI connecting cable (accessory) of suitable length connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter

Procedure

• Observe the coding of the plug and socket ①.

• Lock the connector in the socket ②.
• The HMI connecting cable in the cable duct of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature may only be routed
downward.
Make sure that you install the cable in accordance with EMC requirements. For example,
install data cables separately from the motor cable. Connect both sides of shielded cables
over a large surface area.


 

 
1P

1P

• Insert the push-in lugs into each side of the enclosure until you hear them engage ① and fix
the 3RW5 HMI High Feature on the wall ② / ③.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 63
Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Result
You have installed the 3RW5 HMI High Feature on a level surface and can commission
(Page 127) it.

4.4.4 Installing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the control cabinet door

Requirements
• Note the mounting positions, minimum clearances and ambient conditions stated on the
data sheet.
• Removed 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 60)
• HMI connecting cable (accessory) of suitable length connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter
• Cutout of suitable size in the control cabinet door
• Depth of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature:
– Total depth: 32 mm
– Recessed depth: 26 mm
• Permissible wall thickness of the control cabinet door:
– Without IP65 door mounting kit: 1.5 to 3.0 mm
– With IP65 door mounting kit: 1.0 to 7.0 mm
For using door mounting kit IP65:
• IP65 door mounting kit (accessory)
The fixing brackets with marking "002" are intended for a 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
• Screwdriver PZ2

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

64 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Procedure without IP65 door mounting kit

 s

[

s

Place the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the cutout of the control cabinet door ①. Ensure that the
3RW5 HMI High Feature engages audibly in the 4 fixtures ②.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 65
Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Procedure with IP65 door mounting kit

 







[
 




• Remove the protective film from the adhesive tape on the seal and secure the seal on the rear
side of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ①.
Ensure that the seal does not overlap.
• Place the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the cutout of the control cabinet door ②.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

66 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Continue to screw the screws into the fixing brackets ③ until they protrude approx. 8 mm at
the front. Fasten the fixing brackets onto the 3RW5 HMI High Feature ④.
• Tighten the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with a tightening torque of 0.3 ... 0.35 Nm ⑤.
Ensure that all of the screw heads are in contact with the fixing bracket.

Procedure for installing the HMI connecting cable

• Use the opening to the cable duct ① to install the cable in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter.
• It is possible to route the cable up or down in the cable duct.
Make sure that you install the cable in accordance with EMC requirements. For example,
install data cables separately from the motor cable. Connect both sides of shielded cables
over a large surface area.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 67
Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Procedure for connecting with the HMI connecting cable

• Observe the coding of the plug and socket ①.

• Lock the connector in the socket ②.
• The HMI connecting cable in the cable duct of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature may only be routed
downward.
Make sure that you install the cable in accordance with EMC requirements. For example,
route data cables separately from the motor cable. Connect both sides of shielded cables over
a large surface area.

Result
You have installed the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in the cabinet door and can commission
(Page 127) it.

4.4.5 Replacing the hinged cover of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Requirements
• Suitable hinged cover with or without cutout (accessory)

Procedure

NOTICE
Damage to the HMI display
Ensure that the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature does not sustain damage when replacing
the hinged cover.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

68 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

r



Illustration similar

• Open the hinged cover ① at an angle of approx. 20°.

• Loosen the hinges vertical to the soft starter surface ② / ③ starting from the bottom.
• Take the cover off the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Follow the steps in reverse order to install the replacement hinged cover.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 69
Mounting and dismantling
4.4 Installing, mounting and removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

70 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Connecting 5
5.1 Overview of all connections of the 3RW55 soft starter




0

 0


     

① Main circuit connection, line side 1/L1, 3/L2, 5/L3

② Main circuit connection, load (motor) side 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3
③ A1 / A2: Supply voltage (control supply voltage) for control terminals (24 V AC/DC or 110 - 250 V
AC)
④ Output 13, 14 (output 1): For signaling operating states and faults (parameterizable (Page 198))
⑤ Output 23, 24 (output 2): For signaling operating states and faults (parameterizable (Page 198))
⑥ Output 95, 96 and 98 (output 3): For signaling faults
⑦ Output 43, 44 (output 4): For signaling operating states and faults (parameterizable (Page 198))
⑧ Not assigned
⑨ Analog output AQ-, AQ I+ and AQ U+: For outputting different measured values
• AQ- / AQ U+: For signal type voltage, signal range 0 ... 10 V
• AQ- / AQ I+: For signal type current, signal range 4 - 20 mA

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 71
Connecting
5.1 Overview of all connections of the 3RW55 soft starter

⑩ Control inputs DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4, L+ and M

⑪ Thermistor motor protection T1 and T2: Connection of an optional temperature sensor

Note
Parameterizing the analog output
You can parameterize the output of the analog output with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
(Page 202).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

72 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.2 Overview of all connections of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

5.2 Overview of all connections of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter


7
 7

',

',

',
 ',

0
/

$48

 $4, 0

$4
)',
  )',

)0

)0


 



 





 


 


$
 $


① Main circuit connection, line side 1/L1, 3/L2, 5/L3

② Main circuit connection, load (motor) side 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3
③ A1 / A2: Supply voltage (control supply voltage) for control terminals (24 V AC/DC or 110 - 250 V
AC)
④ Output 13, 14 (output 1): For signaling operating states and faults (parameterizable (Page 198))
⑤ Output 23, 24 (output 2): For signaling operating states and faults (parameterizable (Page 198))
⑥ Output 95, 96 and 98 (output 3): For signaling faults
⑦ Output 41, 42 (output 4, F‑RQ): Failsafe signaling output (not parameterizable)
⑧ F‑DI: Failsafe digital input (not parameterizable)
F‑M: Failsafe input ground (not parameterizable)
⑨ Analog output AQ-, AQ I+ and AQ U+: For outputting different measured values
• AQ- / AQ U+: For signal type voltage, signal range 0 ... 10 V
• AQ- / AQ I+: For signal type current, signal range 4 - 20 mA
⑩ Control inputs DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4, L+ and M
⑪ Thermistor motor protection T1 and T2: Connection of an optional temperature sensor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 73
Connecting
5.3 Connecting 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Note
Parameterizing the analog output
You can parameterize the output of the analog output with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
(Page 202).

5.3 Connecting 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Requirements
• Observe the conductor cross-sections and tightening torques in the data sheet or on the front
of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter beneath the hinged cover.
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.
• Size 5: Terminal cover
• Optional accessories:
– Terminal cover for 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in sizes 2, 3, and 4

Procedure

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

1. Connect the main circuit connections (line side/motor side) of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter (Page 75).
2. On size 5, mount the terminal covers (optional on sizes 2, 3 and 4) (Page 76).
3. Connect the control terminals of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
– Connecting the control terminals (screw terminals) (Page 80)
– Connecting the control terminals (spring-type terminals) (Page 82)
4. Mount the supplied cover for the control cable duct (Page 86).

Result
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is connected and ready to operate.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

74 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.4 Connecting the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to the main circuit connection (line side/motor side)

5.4 Connecting the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to the
main circuit connection (line side/motor side)

Requirements
• Observe the conductor cross-sections and tightening torques in the data sheet or on the front
of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter beneath the hinged cover.
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.
• If you use a bar connection, you require wrenches of widths A/F 13 and 17.

Size Article No. Tightening torque

Size 1 3RW551.-.... 2 ... 2.5 Nm
Size 2 3RW552.-.... 4.5 ... 6 Nm
Size 3 3RW553.-.... 10 ... 14 Nm
Size 4 3RW554.-.... 14 ... 24 Nm
Size 5 3RW555.-.... 20 ... 35 Nm

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

Procedure for screw connection - sizes 1 and 2

  [
[



[ [

Illustration similar

• Connect connection 1/L1, 3/L2, 5/L3 to the supply system ① and tighten the screws ②.
• Repeat steps ① / ② for connection 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3 with the motor.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 75
Connecting
5.5 Mounting terminal covers on main circuit connections

Alternatively, you can also connect the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters with size 2 with
bar connection without the box terminal block.

Procedure for bar connection - sizes 3, 4, and 5

Pay attention to the diagram on the packaging of the connection set.
• Connect the terminals 1/L1, 3/L2, 5/L3 to the power supply.
• Connect the terminals 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3 to the motor.

Note
Cable routing for size 5
Note that the main connection cables and main connection bars have to be supported. The
support must be no more than 300 mm from the edge of the enclosure.

Example circuits
• Feeder assembly, type of coordination 1 fuseless (Page 291)
• Feeder assembly, type of coordination 1 with fuses (Page 293)
• Feeder assembly, type of coordination 2 (Page 294)
• Inside-delta circuit (Page 295)

5.5 Mounting terminal covers on main circuit connections

Requirements
• Sizes 2 - 4: Terminal cover (accessory) for the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• Size 5:
– Terminal cover for 3RW55 soft starter
– Screwdriver TX25

Note
Touch protection by terminal cover
Touch protection according to EN 50274 finger-safe only for vertical contact from the front.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

76 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.5 Mounting terminal covers on main circuit connections

Procedure for sizes 2 - 4

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

Illustration similar

• Make sure that you mount the terminal cover the right way round, as shown in the diagram.
• If you have to remove the terminal cover, proceed in the reverse order.

Procedure for size 5

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 77
Connecting
5.6 Replacement of the box terminal blocks with size 2

1P
[




• Plug the terminal cover into the top of the enclosure of the soft starter ① and tighten the
screws with a torque of 4 Nm.
• If you have to remove the terminal cover, proceed in the reverse order.

5.6 Replacement of the box terminal blocks with size 2

Requirements
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.
• Main circuit connection (line side/motor side) is disconnected from the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

78 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.6 Replacement of the box terminal blocks with size 2

Procedure for removal

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.




Illustration similar

• Pry the box terminal block off the main circuit connections ① / ②.
• Pull the box terminal block off the main circuit connections ③.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 79
Connecting
5.7 Connecting the control terminals (screw terminals)

Assembly procedure

Illustration similar

• Plug the new box terminal block into the main circuit connections ①.

5.7 Connecting the control terminals (screw terminals)

Requirements
• Observe the conductor cross-sections and tightening torques in the data sheet or on the front
of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter beneath the hinged cover.
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.

Procedure

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

80 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.8 Disconnecting the control current form the screw-type terminals

[

[


1P

Illustration similar

Example circuits
You will find further information on connecting the control terminals in chapters Control circuit
connection (Page 299) and Special applications (Page 305).

5.8 Disconnecting the control current form the screw-type terminals

Requirements
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.

Procedure

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 81
Connecting
5.9 Connecting the control terminals (spring-type terminals)

[

 [


Illustration similar

5.9 Connecting the control terminals (spring-type terminals)

Requirements
• Observe the conductor cross-sections and tightening torques in the data sheet or on the front
of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter beneath the hinged cover.
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.

Procedure

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

82 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.10 Disconnecting the control current from the spring-loaded terminals


ar

Illustration similar

Example circuits
You will find further information on connecting the control terminals in chapters Control circuit
connection (Page 299) and Special applications (Page 305).

5.10 Disconnecting the control current from the spring-loaded

terminals

Requirements
• Note the required tools indicated on the front of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
beneath the hinged cover.

Procedure

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 83
Connecting
5.11 Replacing the control terminals


ar

Illustration similar

5.11 Replacing the control terminals

Requirements
• Remove the cover over the control cable duct (Page 87).
• Control terminal as spare part

Type of connection Article No.

Screw terminals 3RW5980-1TR00
Spring-loaded terminals 3RW5980-2TR00

Procedure for removal

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this device before working on this device.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

84 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.11 Replacing the control terminals




Illustration similar

• Press against the lock ① and pull the control terminal out ②.

Assembly procedure

Illustration similar

• Place the control terminal onto the intended connection until the terminal engages.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 85
Connecting
5.12 Installing the cover for the control cable duct

5.12 Installing the cover for the control cable duct

Requirements
• 1–2 cable ties
• Cover of the control cable duct as a spare part

Soft starter Article No.

3RW55 3RW5950-0GD20
3RW55 Failsafe 3RW5950-0GD30

Procedure

NOTICE
Damage to the cables
Make sure that the cables are not trapped prior to locking.

Illustration similar

• Lay the control cables in the control cable ducts and fix the control cables in place with cable
ties.
• Press the cover for the control cable duct into the openings ① provided until it audibly
engages ②.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

86 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Connecting
5.13 Removing the cover of the control cable duct

5.13 Removing the cover of the control cable duct

Procedure

Illustration similar

• Press the cover of the control cable duct at top and bottom ① from the front and remove the
cover for the control cable duct of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter ②.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 87
Connecting
5.13 Removing the cover of the control cable duct

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

88 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Parameter assignment 6
6.1 Parameterizing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Operating principle
In the following example of a procedure, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is
parameterized in parameter set 1 with a 3RW5 HMI High Feature. The 3RW55 and 3RW55
Failsafe soft starters have 3 parameters sets (Page 91), e.g. to start applications with different
load conditions (e.g. conveyor belt full and conveyor belt empty). To set parameter sets 2 and 3,
proceed as described below. In the factory settings, parameter set 1 is active.

Note
Application wizard
To enable simple commissioning the 3RW5 HMI High Feature supports various applications with
an application wizard. In the menu, navigate to "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 /
3 > Application wizard". You will find more information in chapter Application wizard (Page 92).

Parameterization options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
You will find an overview of the menu in chapter Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
(Page 99).
3RW5 HMI High Feature is connected and ready for operation. Access protection to
3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Ex operation
Refer to chapters ATEX / IECEx (Page 16) and ATEX / IECEx (Page 206).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 89
Parameter assignment
6.1 Parameterizing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Failsafe
Refer to chapters Failsafe (Page 20) and Failsafe (Page 212).

Requirements
• The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is mounted and connected.
• Supply voltage (control supply voltage) is present.

Procedure for parameterization on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Set the desired parameters depending on the selected application. You will find an overview of
the menu of the 3RW5 HMI in chapter Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 99).
1. Set the motor parameters (Page 95).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor parameters"
2. Set the start parameters (Page 131).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
Alternatively, use automatic parameterization (Page 132).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Automatic parameterization"
3. Set the stopping mode parameters (Page 146).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings"
4. Set the motor protection (Page 166).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor protection"
5. Set creep speed (Page 172).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Creep speed"
The function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
6. Set the condition monitoring parameters (Page 174).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring"
7. Set the asymmetry monitoring parameters (Page 186).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Asymmetry"
8. Set ground fault monitoring (Page 187).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Ground fault"
9. Set the emergency start (Page 189).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Emergency start"
10.Set emergency run (Page 191).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Emergency run"
The "Emergency run" function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
11.Set the inputs (Page 194).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Inputs"
12.Set the outputs (Page 198).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Outputs"
13.Set the additional parameters (Page 214).
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Additional parameters"

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

90 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.2 Parameter sets

14.Set the date and time (Page 218).

Menu: "Parameter > Soft starter > Date and time"
15.Define the characteristics to be monitored.
– Monitoring the measured values of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 227)
Menu: "Monitoring > Measured values"
– Monitoring the process image of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
(Page 231)
Menu: "Monitoring > Process image"

Note
Last changed parameters
For each parameter set, you can view and directly modify the last 10 changed parameters.
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Last changed parameter"

Result
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter has been parameterized and is ready for
operation. You can now optionally parameterize the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 121).
If you are using a 3RW5 communication module, set its parameters. You will find further
information on operation of the 3RW5 communication module in the manual of the relevant
3RW5 communication module.

6.2 Parameter sets

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters provide 3 individually adjustable parameter sets, of
which only one parameter set is active at a time. Different parameters can be set for each
parameter set. The switchover from one parameter set to another parameter set is only possible
when the motor is switched off. In the factory settings, parameter set 1 is active.

Application
• Starting Dahlander motors (variable-speed drive).
• Starting an application with different load conditions (e.g. empty or full conveyor belt).
• Separate starting of up to 3 drives with different run-up behavior (e.g. compressor and
pump).

Ex operation
In Ex operation (Page 207), only parameter set 1 is active even if another parameter set is
selected. Parameter sets 2 and 3 are not available in this case.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 91
Parameter assignment
6.3 Application wizard

Switchover options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Control > Select parameter set > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 232).
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• Input action (Page 194)
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

6.3 Application wizard

Operating principle
The application wizard enables easy commissioning by suggesting a suitable selection of
parameters for specific applications. A user-defined application can additionally be created. The
application wizard can be used for any parameter set.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Application wizard"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Procedure
1. The menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature provides you with a list of suggested settings
(Page 93) that is reduced to just the relevant parameters.
All parameters that are not displayed remain unchanged.
2. Check the parameters and modify them if necessary.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

92 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.4 Suggested settings of the application wizard

User-defined application
To create a user-defined application, perform the following steps:
1. Choose menu item "User defined" and modify the parameters as you require them.
Confirm your input with the OK key.
2. Choose menu item "Reset default parameter".
Confirm your input with the OK key.
3. To save the application parameters, exit the menu with the ESC key and confirm the user
information "Save application parameter?" with the OK key.
The application parameter has been saved. You can reset to the default parameters of the
user-defined application with the menu item "Set default parameter" or with the factory
setting of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Result
The parameterization has been performed for the selected application. You can make changes
to parameters at any time in the "Parameters" menu.

6.4 Suggested settings of the application wizard

Parameter Small ventilator (fan) Big ventilator (fan) Pump

Rated operational current Ie Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
Starting mode Voltage ramp + Current limit‐ Torque control + Current lim‐ Voltage ramp + Current limit‐
ing iting ing
Current limiting value 400% 400% 400%
Starting voltage 40% Not relevant 40%
Ramp up time 4s 40 s 10 s
Starting torque Not relevant 30% Not relevant
Limiting torque Not relevant 150% Not relevant
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Pump stopping mode
Stopping time Not relevant Not relevant 10 s
Stopping torque Not relevant Not relevant 10%
Trip class CLASS 10E CLASS 30E CLASS 10E

Parameter Hydraulic pump Compressors Conveyor belts

Rated operational current Ie Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
Starting mode Voltage ramp + Current limit‐ Torque control + Current lim‐ Torque control
ing iting
Current limiting value 400% 400% Not relevant
Starting voltage 40% Not relevant Not relevant
Ramp up time 10 s 4s 10 s
Starting torque Not relevant 50% 70%
Limiting torque Not relevant 150% 150%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 93
Parameter assignment
6.4 Suggested settings of the application wizard

Parameter Hydraulic pump Compressors Conveyor belts

Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Torque control
Stopping time Not relevant Not relevant 10 s
Stopping torque Not relevant Not relevant 10%
Trip class CLASS 10E CLASS 10E CLASS 10E

Parameter Roller conveyor Agitator Centrifuge

Rated operational current Ie Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
Starting mode Torque control Voltage ramp + Current limit‐ Voltage ramp + Current limit‐
ing ing
Current limiting value Not relevant 400% 400%
Starting voltage Not relevant 40% 40%
Ramp up time 10 s 4s 4s
Starting torque 60% Not relevant Not relevant
Limiting torque 150% Not relevant Not relevant
Stopping mode Torque control Coasting down Coasting down
Stopping time 10 s Not relevant Not relevant
Stopping torque 10% Not relevant Not relevant
Trip class CLASS 10E CLASS 20E CLASS 20E

Parameter Milling machine Mills Crushers

Rated operational current Ie Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
Starting mode Voltage ramp + Current limit‐ Voltage ramp + Current limit‐ Voltage ramp + Current limit‐
ing ing ing
Current limiting value 400% 400% 400%
Starting voltage 40% 50% 50%
Ramp up time 4s 40 s 40 s
Starting torque Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant
Limiting torque Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down
Stopping time Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant
Stopping torque Not relevant Not relevant Not relevant
Trip class CLASS 20E CLASS 30E CLASS 30E
Breakaway time Not relevant 0.3 s 0.3 s
Breakaway voltage Not relevant 80% 80%

Parameter Circular saws/band saws User defined

Rated operational current Ie Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
Starting mode Torque control + Current limiting Torque control + Current limiting
Current limiting value 400% 400%
Starting voltage Not relevant 40%
Ramp up time 40 s 10 s

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

94 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.5 Motor parameters

Parameter Circular saws/band saws User defined

Starting torque 30% 50%
Limiting torque 150% 150%
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down
Stopping time Not relevant 10 s
Stopping torque Not relevant 10%
Trip class CLASS 30E CLASS 10E
Breakaway time Not relevant 0 s (deactivated)
Breakaway voltage Not relevant 0% (deactivated)

6.5 Motor parameters

Operating principle
On the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters, you can set the motor parameters "Rated
operational current Ie", "Service factor", "Rated torque", "Rated operating speed" and "Motor
connection type". Setting of the rated operational current Ie is the minimum requirement for
operation. The motor parameters are located on the rating plate of the three-phase induction
motor being used. You will find a description of all other parameters in chapter Functions
(Page 129).

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor parameters"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter
> "Parameters" > Window "Work area" >"Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor
parameters"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 95
Parameter assignment
6.5 Motor parameters

Rated operational current Ie

The rated operational current Ie is the current that can be continuously conducted by the feeder
(switchgear and motor). Normally this is the rated current Ie of the motor. The setting range
depends on the rating class of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Note
Electronic motor overload protection
The electronic motor overload protection (Page 166) can be switched off. In this case, motor
overload protection must be ensured by means of a temperature sensor (Page 169) in the motor
(thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor).

Service factor
Three-phase motors have a service factor that is stated relative to the rated power of the motor.
The service factor determines the maximum permissible overload factor of the motor in the
ramped-up status. A service factor of, for example, 1.15 means that you can operate the motor
up to 1.15 times the rated power without damaging it permanently.
To be able to use these higher motor power ratings, you must set the parameter "Service factor"
on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter so that the motor overload protection is triggered
after an appropriate delay. If a service factor has been specified by the manufacturer, set this
service factor. If no service factor is specified, set service factor 1.0 (factory setting).
Note the different trip characteristics for a service factor ≤ 1.05 and > 1.05 in the Internet (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/25099/char).

Setting range Factory setting Increment

1.0 ... 1.15 1.0 0.01

Rated torque
If the motor's rated torque is not indicated on the rating plate, you can calculate it using the
following formula:
Rated torque (Nm) = Power (kW) × (9 550 / rated operating speed (rpm))
For the setting "0 Nm" (factory setting), the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters calculate the
required value automatically.

Setting range Factory setting Increment

0 ... 10 000 Nm 0 Nm 1 Nm

Rated operating speed

The rated operating speed is required for calculating the current rated torque.

Setting range Factory setting Increment

500 ... 3 600 rpm 1 500 rpm 1 rpm

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

96 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.5 Motor parameters

Motor connection type

In the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the menu item is "Type of connection".

Motor connection type Description

Automatic detection The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects the motor con‐
nection type (standard (inline) circuit or inside-delta circuit) auto‐
matically if the main supply voltage (operational voltage) is applied
and the motor is connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter. Thus no parameterization of the motor connection type is
necessary.
Standard The connections of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter are
wired into the motor feeder between the motor starter protector
and the motor.
Inside-delta The inside-delta circuit makes it possible to increase the operable
motor power of the individual 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft start‐
ers by a factor of root 3.
Operation in inside-delta circuit is only possible for operating vol‐
tages up to 600 V.

Example: A 3RW55 soft starter 720 A can be used in standard (inline) circuit for 400 kW motors,
in inside-delta circuit for 710 kW motors.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 97
Parameter assignment
6.6 Design and operator controls of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

6.6 Design and operator controls of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

 

 





        

① Display
② Device LEDs (Page 247)
③ Navigation keys
④ Cable duct
⑤ Plug-in connection for HMI connecting cable
⑥ Master RESET key
⑦ OK key
⑧ ESC key
⑨ Motor stop key
⑩ Motor start key
⑪ Function selection key
⑫ Eyes for lead seals
⑬ Hole for mounting the interface cover
⑭ Status LED (Page 249)
⑮ Local interface (point-to-point connection between PC and 3RW5 HMI High Feature)
⑯ Slot for micro SD card (Page 243)

Navigating and setting

The keys are used for navigation, for selecting and setting menu items and for executing
predefined actions.

Key Actions
• Move one position to the right in the input field
• Displaying and switching over graphs. You will find more information in chapter Graphical display of measured
values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 229).
• Move one position to the left in the input field
• Switching over graphs. You will find more information in chapter Graphical display of measured values on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 229).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

98 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Key Actions
• Jump to next menu item
• Set number or letter
• Jump to previous menu item
• Set number or letter
2. • To confirm
• To open the menu
• Jump to selected menu item
(6& • To exit the menu

• Motor stops as parameterized if the 3RW5 HMI High Feature has control

• Motor starts as parameterized if the 3RW5 HMI High Feature has control.
After an error has been acknowledged when using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, you must repeat the ON
command by pressing the "Motor Start" key.
)) • F1: Local/Remote: Changes master control
• F2: Reset
• F3 ... F9: Freely parameterizable
Master RESET key for restoring the factory setting (Page 280).

Master control function of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

The 3RW5 HMI High Feature supports you by fetching master control if this is required for
execution of a function. If the 3RW5 HMI High Feature does not have master control (Remote),
the following information appears on the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature when a function
is entered:
"HMI does not have the control for the starter" - "Do you want the HMI to fetch the control?"
If you confirm the information with the OK key, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature fetches master
control (Local). To execute the function, you must then enter it again.
Refer to chapter Operating modes and master control function (Page 32).

6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

This chapter explains the full menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. Depending on the following
points, contents may or may not be available:
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• Up-to-date status of the firmware (Page 22)
This chapter refers to the necessary firmware version of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. If a
newer firmware version of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is required, refer to the
description of the respective function.
• 3RW5 communication module

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 99
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Overview of the main menu options on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Monitoring Diagnosis Control Parameters

Overview Security Micro SD card1)

1)
Only visible if a micro SD card is plugged.

Additional information
Menu item "Additional information" shows the following QR code. The link behind the QR code
is the 3RW5 topic page (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747404).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

100 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Monitoring [1/1]

Measured values

- Phase currents (%)

∟ I L1
∟ I L2
∟ I L3
∟ Average
∟ Show bar chart1)
- Phase currents (rms)
∟ I L1
∟ I L2
∟ I L3
∟ Average
∟ I L1/L2/L3 max
∟ Show bar chart1)
- Asymmetry
- Motor voltage
∟ U L1-L2
∟ U L2-L3
∟ U L3-L1
- Power
∟ Active power
∟ Power factor L1...3
- Line frequency
- Output frequency
- Motor temperature rise
- Remaining time for motor overload protection
- Remaining motor cooling time
- Remaining switching element cooling time
- Switching element heating
- Remaining switching frequency monit. time

Process image

- Process image input (PII)

∟ Ready (automatic)
∟ Motor On
∟ Group error
∟ [...] 2)
- Process image output (PIQ)
∟ Motor CW
∟ Motor CCW
∟ Reset
∟ [...] 2)

Additional information

1)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0
2)
Further menu items. Refer to chapters Monitoring the process image of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 231) and Process data and process images (Page 196).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 101
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Diagnosis [1/2]

Soft Starter

- Diagnosis state
∟ Errors
∟ Warnings
- Device state
∟ Active parameter set
∟ Type of connection
∟ Rotation direction
∟ Device I/Os
∟ Inputs
∟ [...]1)
∟ Outputs
∟ [...]2)
∟Energy saving mode
∟ [...]3)
- Statistic data
∟ Active energy import total
∟ Operating hours - motor
∟ Reset operating hours motor
∟ Number of motor overload trips
∟ Number of starts motor CW
∟ Number of starts motor CCW
∟ Number of starts output1
∟ Number of starts output2
∟ Number of starts output3
∟ Number of starts output4
∟ Number of braking stops
∟ Phase current max (%)
∟ Phase current max (A)
∟ Last tripping current IA (%)
∟ Last tripping current IA (rms)
∟ Number of switching element overload trips
∟ Number of bypass overload trips
∟ Operating hours - device
∟ Last real starting time
- Maximum pointer
∟Phase currents (%)
∟ Phase current I L1 min
∟ Phase current I L2 min
∟ Phase current I L3 min
∟ Phase current I L1 max
∟ Phase current I L2 max
∟ Phase current I L3 max
∟Phase currents (rms)
∟ Phase current I L1 min
∟ Phase current I L2 min
∟ Phase current I L3 min
∟ Phase current I L1 max
∟ Phase current I L2 max
∟ Phase current I L3 max
1)
Display of active inputs
2)
Display of active outputs
3)
Further menu items. Refer to chapter Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the
3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 257).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

102 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Diagnosis [2/2]

Soft Starter

∟ Line-to-line voltages (rms)

∟ U L1-L2 min
∟ U L2-L3 min
∟ U L3-L1 min
∟ U L1-L2 max
∟ U L2-L3 max
∟ U L3-L1 max
∟ Maximum trigger current (%)
∟ Maximum trigger current (A)
∟ Number of motor overload trips
∟ Number of starts with ext. bypass1)
∟ Minimum line frequency
∟ Maximum line frequency
∟ Maximum switching element heating
∟ Reset maximum pointer
- Self-test
- Logbooks
∟ Application
∟ Device
∟ Security
∟ Service
∟ Delete
∟ Application

Communication module

- Diagnosis state
∟ Errors
∟ Prewarnings
∟ Device state2)

HMI

- Diagnosis state
∟ Errors
∟ Warnings
∟ Device state
- Self-test
∟ Test LEDs
∟ Test buttons
∟ Test display

Additional information

1)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V2.0
2)
For 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module only

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 103
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Control [1/1]

- Select parameter set

∟ Parameter set 1
∟ Parameter set 2
∟ Parameter set 3
- Local / Remote1)
- Control motor
∟ Motor CW
∟ Motor CCW
∟ Stop motor
∟ Enable / Disable creep speed1)
∟ Enable / Disable alternative stopping mode1)
∟ Pump cleaning start / stop1), 2)
- Reset
- Enable / Disable Quick-stop1)
- Enable / Disable Emergency start1)
- Enable / Disable emergency run1), 3)
- Test mode
∟ Activate / Deactivate test with small load1)
∟ Activate / Deactivate simulation1), 2)
- Enable / Disable PIQ-DQ Bit 1.01)
- Enable / Disable PIQ-DQ Bit 1.11)
- Enable / Disable PIQ-DQ Bit 2.01)

Additional information

1)
Display depends on the current setting
2)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V2.0
3)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

104 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [1/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Parameter set 1 x
∟ Last changed parameter
∟ [...]1)
∟ Automatic parameterization
∟ Rated operational current Ie x 2)
∟ Application
∟ Small ventilator x
∟ No application active
∟ Hydraulic pump
∟ Big ventilator
∟ Milling machine
∟ Conveyor belt
∟ Crusher
∟ Centrifuge
∟ Agitator
∟ Roller conveyor
∟ Pump
∟ Mill
∟ Saw
∟ Compressor
∟ User defined
∟ Advanced parameters
∟ Automatic parameterization
∟ OFF x
∟ ON - with preset starting time
∟ ON - with preset starting time and current limit
∟ Preset starting time 10 s
∟ Current limiting value 400 %
∟ Application wizard
∟ Small ventilator
∟ Rated operational current Ie x 2)
∟ Starting mode x3)
∟ Current limiting value 400 %
∟ Starting voltage 40 %
∟ Ramp up time 4s
∟ Stopping mode x4)
∟ Trip class CLASS 10E
∟ Big ventilator [...]5)
∟ Pump [...]5)
∟ Hydraulic pump [...]5)
∟ Compressor [...]5)
∟ Conveyor belt [...]5)
∟ Roller conveyor [...]5)
∟ Agitator [...]5)
∟ Centrifuge [...]5)
∟ Milling machine [...]5)
1)
Further menu items
2)
Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
3)
Voltage ramp + Current limiting
4)
Coasting down
5)
Contains the lower level with settable parameters. Refer to chapter Suggested settings of the application wizard (Page 93).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 105
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [2/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Mill [...]1)
∟ Crusher [...]1)
∟ Saw [...]1)
∟ User defined [...]1)
∟ Motor parameters
∟ Rated operational current Ie x 2)
∟ Service factor 1.0
∟ Rated torque 0 Nm
∟ Rated operating speed 1 500 1/min
∟ Type of connection
∟ Automatic detection x
∟ Standard
∟ Inside-delta
∟ Start settings
∟ Starting mode
∟ Voltage ramp + Current limiting x
∟ Voltage ramp
∟ Torque control + Current limiting
∟ Torque control
∟ Motor heating
∟ Direct
∟ Starting voltage3) 30 %
∟ Current limiting value3) 400 %
∟ Ramp up time3) 10 s
∟ Maximum starting time3) 0s
∟ Breakaway time3) 0s
∟ Breakaway voltage3) 40 %
∟ Starting torque3)
∟ Limiting torque3)
∟ Motor heating power3)
1)
Contains the lower level with settable parameters. Refer to chapter Suggested settings of the application wizard (Page 93).
2)
Rated operational current Ie of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter used
3)
Display depending on the set Starting mode.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

106 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [3/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Stopping mode settings
∟ Stopping mode
∟ Coasting down
∟ Voltage ramp x
∟ Torque control
∟ Pump stopping mode
∟ Reversing DC braking
∟ Dynamic DC braking
∟ DC braking
∟ Stopping time1) 10 s
∟ Stopping torque1)
∟ Dynamic braking torque1)
∟ DC braking torque1)
∟ DC braking delay1)
∟ Sensorless motor standstill detection1)
∟ Alternative stopping
∟ Alternative stopping mode
∟ Coasting down x
∟ Voltage ramp
∟ Torque control
∟ Pump stopping mode
∟ Reversing DC braking
∟ Dynamic DC braking
∟ DC braking
∟ Alternative stopping time2)
∟ Alternative stopping torque2)
∟ Alternative dynamic braking torque2)
∟ Alternative DC braking torque2)
∟ Alternative DC braking delay2)
∟ Motor protection
∟ Electronic motor overload protection
∟ Trip class CLASS 10E
∟ [...]3)
∟ Warning limits
∟ Remaining time for tripping 0s
∟ Heating 0%
∟ Response to overload thermal motor model
∟ Turn off without restart x
∟ Turn off with restart
∟ Recovery time 300 s
∟ Non-volatile tripping status
∟ Yes x
∟ No
1)
Display depending on the set Stopping mode.
2)
Display depending on the set Alternative stopping mode.
3)
Display of the Trip classes.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 107
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [4/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Temperature sensor
∟ Sensor type
∟ Deactivated x
∟ Thermoclick
∟ PTC type A
∟ Response to overload temperature sensor
∟ Turn off without restart x
∟ Turn off with restart
∟ Warn
∟ Creep speed
∟ Creep speed factor right 7
∟ Creep speed torque right 50 %
∟ Creep speed factor left 7
∟ Creep speed torque left 50 %
∟ Condition Monitoring
∟ Current monitoring
∟ Upper limit
∟ Upper limit - error 0%
∟ Upper limit - maintenance demanded 0%
∟ Response to error
∟ Do not turn off x
∟ Turn off
∟ Lower limit
∟ Lower limit - error 0%
∟ Lower limit - maintenance demanded 0%
∟ Response to error
∟ Do not turn off x
∟ Turn off
∟ Active power monitoring
∟ Reference value 0W
∟ Upper limit
∟ Upper limit - error 0%
∟ Upper limit - maintenance demanded 0%
∟ Response to error
∟ Do not turn off x
∟ Turn off
∟ Lower limit
∟ Lower limit - error 0%
∟ Lower limit - maintenance demanded 0%
∟ Response to error
∟ Do not turn off x
∟ Turn off

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

108 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [5/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer

∟ Switching frequency monitoring

∟ Mode
∟ Deactivated x
∟ OFF - ON
∟ ON - ON
∟ Monitoring time 1 0s
∟ Monitoring time 2 0s
∟ Maximum number of starts 2
∟ Response to ON-command during active monit. time
∟ Warning with lock-out x
∟ Warning without lock-out
∟ Turn off without restart
∟ Turn off with restart
∟ Starting time monitoring
∟ Preset starting time 10 s
∟ Upper limit - maintenance demanded 0%
∟ Lower limit - maintenance demanded 0%
∟ Pump cleaning
∟ Mode
∟ Deactivated x
∟ Manual
∟ Time 20 s
∟ Cycles 3
∟ Start/stop parameters
∟ Operating parameters x
∟ Parameter set 3
∟ Parameter set 2
∟ Parameter set 1
- Parameter set 2 [...]1)
- Parameter set 3 [...]1)
- Asymmetry
∟ Limit - warning 0%
∟ Limit - error 30 %
- Ground fault
∟ Limit - warning 0%
∟ Limit - error 20 %
- Emergency mode
∟ Emergency start
∟ Manually enable/disable
∟ Disable x
∟ Emergency running2)
∟ Disable x
∟ Manually enable/disable
∟ Enable
1)
Further menu items such as Parameter set 1.
2)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 109
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [6/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
- Inputs
∟ Input 1-Action
∟ Motor CW with PS1 x
∟ Motor CCW with PS3
∟ Motor CCW with PS2
∟ Motor CCW with PS1
∟ Operating mode manual - local
∟ No action
∟ Emergency start
∟ Use alternative stopping mode
∟ Reset
∟ Creep speed
∟ Quick-stop
∟ Pump cleaning - mode
∟ Motor standstill
∟ Motor CW with PS3
∟ Motor CW with PS2
∟ Input 2-Action
∟ No action x
∟ [...]1)
∟ Input 3-Action
∟ No action x
∟ [...]1)
∟ Input 4-Action
∟ Reset x
∟ [...]1)
- Outputs
∟ Digital output 1
∟ Action
∟ On time motor (RUN) x
∟ Group warning
∟ Group error
∟ Generator operation
∟ Device on
∟ Device error
∟ DC brake contactor
∟ Control source PIQ-DQ-2.0 output 3
∟ Control source PIQ-DQ-1.1 output 2
∟ Control source PIQ-DQ-1.0 output 1
∟ Control source input 4
∟ Control source input 3
∟ Control source input 2
∟ Control source input 1
1)
Further menu items such as Input 1‑Action.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

110 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [7/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Control command motor ON
∟ CM - maintenance demanded
∟ CM - error
∟ Bus error
∟ Alternative stopping mode active
∟ Start-up
∟ Run-down
∟ Reversing switching element - right
∟ Reversing switching element - left
∟ Ready to start for motor ON
∟ Pump cleaning active
∟ No action
∟ Operation / Run-down
∟ External bypass1)
∟ Operation / bypass
∟ ON delay 0s
∟ OFF delay 0s
∟ Digital output 2
∟ Action
∟ No action x
∟ [...]2)
∟ ON delay 0s
∟ OFF delay 0s
∟ Digital output 4
∟ Action
∟ Group error x
∟ [...]2)
∟ ON delay 0s
∟ OFF delay 0s
∟ Analog output
∟ Output signal type
∟ Deactivated x
∟ 4-20 mA
∟ 0-10 V
1)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V2.0
2)
Further menu items such as Digital output 1.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 111
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [8/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Measured value
∟ Deactivated
∟ Active power
∟ Active energy import total
∟ Switching element heating
∟ Power factor L1...3
∟ Phase current I L3 (rms)
∟ Phase current I L3 (%)
∟ Phase current I L2 (rms)
∟ Phase current I L2 (%)
∟ Phase current I L1 (rms)
∟ Phase current I L1 (%)
∟ Phase current average (rms)
∟ Phase current average (%)
∟ Motor temperature rise
∟ Line voltage U L3-L1 (rms)
∟ Line voltage U L2-L3 (rms)
∟ Line voltage U L1-L2 (rms)
∟ Range start value 0
∟ Range end value 27648
∟ Cyclic send data
∟ Measured value 1
∟ Phase current I L1 (rms) x
∟ [...]1)
∟ Measured value 2
∟ Phase current I L2 (rms) x
∟ [...]1)
∟ Measured value 3
∟ Phase current I L3 (rms) x
∟ [...]1)
- Ex operation2)
∟ Ex application
∟ Ex-relevant parameters
- Additional parameters
∟ Operation with CPU / Master
∟ Response to CPU/Master Stop
∟ Switch substitute value x
∟ Keep last value
1)
Further menu items. Refer to chapter Cyclic send data (Page 205).
2)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V2.0

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

112 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [9/12]

Setting Setting
Soft Starter Factory Customer
∟ Substitute value
∟ Motor CW 0
∟ Motor CCW 0
∟ Reset 0
∟ Emergency start 0
∟ Creep speed 0
∟ Output 1 0
∟ Output 2 0
∟ Parameter set
∟ Parameter set 1 x
∟ Parameter set 3
∟ Parameter set 2
∟ Disable Quick-stop 0
∟ Output 3 0
∟ Use alternative stopping mode 0
∟ Motor standstill 0
∟ Parameters of CPU/master disabled
∟ Deactivate x
∟ Activate only for startup parameter
∟ Activate
∟ Response to overload switching element
∟ Turn off without restart x
∟ Turn off with restart
∟ Response to preset unequal actual configuration of HMI
∟ Ignore x
∟ Warn
∟ Turn off
∟ Bypass operating mode
∟ Internal bypass x
∟ No bypass
∟ External bypass without current measurement
∟ Permissible main power rotation
∟ Any x
∟ Counter-clockw.
∟ Clockwise
∟ Response to faulty main power
∟ Group error only at ON command x
∟ Warn
∟ Typical ambient temperature 60 °C
- Date and time
∟ Edit time
∟ Time format 12 h
∟ Time offset +00:00
∟ Display time
∟ Disable1) x
∟ Enable1)
∟ Edit date
∟ Format of date MMDDYY
1)
Display depends on the current setting

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 113
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [10/12]

Setting Setting
Communication module Factory Customer

- PROFIBUS1)
∟ Station address 126
∟ Baud rate
- PROFINET2)
∟ MAC address
∟ Device name
∟ IP address
∟ Subnet mask
∟ Router address
- PROFINET HF3)
∟ MAC address
∟ Device name
∟ IP address
∟ Subnet mask
∟ Router address
- Modbus RTU4)
∟ Server address 126
∟ Baud rate
∟ Port configuration
∟ Access monitoring time 5s
∟ Silent interval time
- Detected baud rate4)
- Detected port configuration4)
- Modbus TCP5)
∟ MAC address
∟ IP address 192.168.42.99
∟ Subnet mask 255.255.255.15
∟ Router address 0.0.0.0
∟ Access monitoring time 5s
- EtherNet/IP6)
∟ MAC address
∟ IP address setting
∟ IP address
∟ Subnet mask
∟ Router address
- Group diagnostics1), 2), 3)
∟ Group error1), 2), 3)
∟ Group warning2), 3)
- NTP time synchronization3)
∟ Server IP address
∟ Update interval
- Web server3)
∟ [...]7)
- OPC UA server3)
∟ [...]7)
1)
For 3RW5 PROFIBUS communication module
2)
For 3RW5 PROFINET Standard communication module
3)
For 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module
4)
For 3RW5 Modbus RTU communication module
5)
For 3RW5 Modbus TCP communication module
6)
For 3RW5 EtherNet/IP communication module
7)
Further menu items. You will find further information in the equipment manual for the 3RW5 PROFINET communication
modules.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

114 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [11/12]

Setting Setting
HMI Factory Customer
- Local interface activated1) x
- Local interface deactivated1)
- Timer lighting dark 5 min
- Do control after log off
∟ Continue with motor control
∟ Stop motor and give back control x
- Messages to show
∟ Errors
∟ Enable x
∟ Disable
∟ Warnings
∟ Enable x
∟ Disable
- Operation display
∟ Measured value 1
∟ Phase current average (%)2) x
∟ Measured value 2
∟ Phase current average (rms)2) x
∟ Measured value 3
∟ Line voltage U L1-L2 (rms)2) x
∟ Measured value 4
∟ Active power2) x
∟ Measured value 5
∟ Power factor L1...32) x
- Edit function favorites
∟ F13) Local / Remote
∟ F23) Reset
∟ F34)
∟ F44)
∟ F54)
∟ F64)
∟ F74)
∟ F84)
∟ F94)
- Configure start key
∟ Control command 1
∟ Motor CW5) x
∟ Control command 2
∟ No start type selected5) x
∟ Control command 3
∟ No start type selected5) x
∟ Control command 4
∟ No start type selected5) x
- Languages6) English
1)
Display depends on the current setting
2)
Further menu items. Refer to chapter Monitoring the measured values of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 227).
3)
Menu items are permanently set. Refer to chapter Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 117).
4)
Contains the lower level with menu items. Refer to chapter Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature (Page 117).
5)
Further menu items. Refer to chapter Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 119).
6)
Contains the lower level with settable languages.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 115
Parameter assignment
6.7 Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters [12/12]

Setting Setting
Factory settings Factory Customer

- Soft Starter
- Communication module
- HMI
- All devices

Additional information

Overview [1/1]

Soft Starter

- Module
∟ Article number
∟ Hardware
∟ Firmware
- Module information
∟ Tag function
∟ Tag location
∟ Installation date
∟ Additional information
- Manufacturer information
∟ Manufacturer
∟ Serial number

Communication module

- Module
∟ Article number
∟ Hardware
∟ Firmware
- Manufacturer information
∟ Manufacturer
∟ Serial number

HMI

- Module
∟ Article number
∟ Hardware
∟ Firmware
- Manufacturer information
∟ Manufacturer
∟ Serial number

Additional information

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

116 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.8 Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Security [1/1]

- Local access protection

∟ Define PIN1)
∟ Change PIN1)
∟ Delete PIN1)
∟ Auto log off time
∟ Log on
∟ Log off
- User login
- User log off

Additional information

Micro SD card [1/1]

- Load parameter settings to soft starter

- Save parameter settings to micro SD card
- Device change
- Save trace data to micro SD card2)
- Save logbooks to micro SD card
- Save service data to micro SD card3)
- FW update
∟ Soft Starter
∟ HMI
∟ Communication module
- Download language2)
- Memory space
∟ Complete memory
∟ Free memory
∟ Used memory

Additional information

1)
Display depends on the current setting
2)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0
3)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V2.0

6.8 Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature

Operating principle
Pressing a Function selection key F1‑F9 on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature causes the function
stored there to be executed. The function favorites F1 and F2 are permanently assigned the
functions "Local/Remote" and "Reset". The function favorites F3 to F9 can be parameterized by
assigning further functions to them.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 117
Parameter assignment
6.8 Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > HMI > Edit function favorites"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" >"HMI > Edit function favorites"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Procedure for configuration on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

1. Press the Function selection key F1‑F9 on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and choose menu item
"Edit function favorites". Confirm by pressing the OK key.
Alternatively via menu: "Parameters > HMI > Edit function favorites"
2. Select the Function favorites F3 to F9 and confirm with the OK key.
The Function selection menu appears on the display.
3. Select the desired function and confirm with the OK key.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

118 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.9 Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters

Parameters Description
F1 - Local/Remote 1)
Changes master control
F2 - Reset Acknowledges faults
Edit function favorites F3 ... F9 Menu for Function selection F1 ... F9:
• No function
• Motor CCW - creep speed2)
• Motor CCW
• Motor CW - creep speed2)
• Motor CW
• Start pump cleaning
• Select parameter set3)
• Alternative stopping mode
• Quick-stop
• Save logbooks to micro SD card
• Save parameter settings to micro SD card
• Creep speed2)
• Emergency start3)
• Emergency run2), 3), 4)
• Local/Remote (permanent setting F1)
• Reset (permanent setting F2)
1)
Display depends on the current setting
2)
Not available with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
3)
Not available for Ex operation
4)
3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0

Result
You have reassigned the function favorites F3 ... F9.

6.9 Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Operating principle
You can assign up to 4 different start functions to the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
In the factory setting, the start function "Motor CW" is assigned to the start key. If the start key is
configured and then pressed, this opens the parameterized start functions in a pop-up window.
They can then be selected by means of the navigation keys and activated with the "OK" key.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 119
Parameter assignment
6.9 Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: You are in menu "Parameters > HMI > Configure start key".
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" >"HMI > Configure start key"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Master control function of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Note the information in chapter Design and operator controls of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI
(Page 98).

Procedure for configuration on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

1. In the "Configure start key" menu, select the required start function and confirm with the OK
key.
You can assign as many as 4 start functions to the start key.
2. Press the start key.
You receive a list of all the assigned start functions.
3. Select the required start function and confirm with the OK key.
The selected start function is executed.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Motor CW (factory setting) Motor turns clockwise
Motor CW - creep speed1), 2) Motor turns clockwise with active creep speed
Motor CCW1) Motor turns counter-clockwise
Motor CCW - creep speed1), 2) Motor turns counter-clockwise with active creep speed
1)
This control command is only available in conjunction with the activated function "Creep speed" or
"Reversing operation".
2)
Function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

120 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.10 Parameterizing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Result
As many as 4 start functions have been assigned to the start key. These functions can be selected
and executed after actuating the start key.

6.10 Parameterizing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > HMI"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "HMI"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameter

Parameters Description
Local interface activated The parameter is only visible if the local interface is enabled (factory setting).
(via 3RW5 HMI High Feature only) Disables the local interface of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
Before you can connect a PC with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) and the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter via the local interface, the local interface must be enabled.
You can prevent unauthorized access via SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) by disabling
the local interface.
Local interface deactivated The parameter is only visible if the local interface is disabled.
(via 3RW5 HMI High Feature only) Enables the local interface of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
Timer lighting dark If no keys on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature are pressed, the display will shut down after a
specified time period has elapsed. The setting "0 min" deactivates shutdown of the
display.
• Factory setting: 5 min
• Setting range: 0 ... 60 min
• In steps of: 1 min

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 121
Parameter assignment
6.10 Parameterizing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters Description
Do control after log off This parameter describes the response after logging off while the motor is running.
• Continue with motor control
Control is retained by the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
• Stop motor and give back control (factory setting)
The motor stops and the master control is no longer with the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature. Refer to chapter Operating modes and master control function (Page 32).
Messages to show If errors and/or warnings are enabled, they will appear as pop-up windows in the
display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature as soon as they occur.
• Error
– Enable (factory setting)
– Disable
• Warnings
– Enable (factory setting)
– Disable
Operation display You can select up to 5 different measured values from a list of measured values. These
measured values are then shown in the operation display of the 3RW5 HMI High Fea‐
ture. You will find further information on measured values in chapter Monitoring the
measured values of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
(Page 227).
• Phase current average (%) (factory setting)
• Phase current average (rms) (factory setting)
• Line voltage U L1-L2 (rms) (factory setting)
• Active power (factory setting)
• Power factor L1...3 (factory setting)
Edit function favorites Setting the function selection menu F1‑F9.
You will find more information in chapter Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9
of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 117).
Configure start key Setting the start key
You will find more information in chapter Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature (Page 119).
Language The required language is set in the "Language" menu.
• English (factory setting)
• German
• French
• Spanish
• Italian
• Portuguese
• Chinese
• Additional language1) (Page 245)
1)
Only visible if an additional language has been added.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

122 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Parameter assignment
6.11 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series / identically

6.11 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series /

identically

6.11.1 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with micro SD card
in series / identically
If you want to parameterize multiple 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters identically, you can
parameterize them serially with a micro SD card.

Requirements
• Micro SD card (Page 243)

Procedure
1. Parameterize the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe (Page 89) soft starter and the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 121).
2. Plug the micro SD card into the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
3. Load the parameters onto the micro SD card.
Menu: "Micro SD card > Save parameter settings to micro SD card"
Example of a folder name created on the micro SD card: "1P3RW5 xxx-xxxxx"
Note the information in chapter Micro SD card (Page 243).
4. Remove the micro SD card from the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
5. Insert the micro SD card into the 3RW5 HMI High Feature on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter that you want to parameterize identically to the original 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter.
6. Load the parameters onto the new 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
Menu: "Micro SD card > Load parameter settings to soft starter"
Note the information in chapter Micro SD card (Page 243).
7. Complete the parameter settings. Parameters that are not transferred include I&M data
(Page 234) and communication parameters, for example. If you want to include the
communication parameters in the transfer, please note the information on the "Device
change" function (Page 281).
8. If you wish, repeat the procedure for further 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.

Result
You have parameterized multiple 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters identically.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 123
Parameter assignment
6.11 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series / identically

6.11.2 Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series / identically
with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)
If you want to parameterize multiple 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters identically, you can
parameterize them in series with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).

Requirements
• SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)

Procedure
1. Parameterize the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
– Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft
Starter > "Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter"
– Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft
Starter > "Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "HMI"
2. Save the project.
3. Disconnect the link to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
4. Connect the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter for which you want to set new parameters
to the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
5. Transfer the data to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
Button: "Download to device" on the toolbar.
In the "Project Navigation" window, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must be
selected in the current project so that the button can be operated. The 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter must not be connected online to SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
6. If you wish, repeat the procedure for further 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.

Result
You have parameterized multiple 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters identically.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

124 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Commissioning 7
7.1 Commissioning 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Procedure
1. Mount the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe (Page 55) soft starter.
2. Connect the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 74).
3. Set the required language, the current date and time and the rated operational current.
First commissioning of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 127)
4. Parameterize the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter for your application (Page 89).
For support, use the application wizard (Page 92) and automatic parameterization
(Page 132).
5. Conduct a test of the application in test mode (Page 221).
6. Optionally, you can run diagnostics (Page 257) including Self-test (user-test) (Page 264) to
test correct functioning of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
7. Set the access protection (optional).
– Local access protection (PIN) (Page 237)
– User login and logout (Page 242)
– Sealing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters (optional) (Page 126)

Note
Last changed parameters
For each parameter set, you can view and directly modify the last 10 changed parameters.
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Last changed parameter"

Result
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is ready for operation and protected from external
access.
You will find additional information on operating modes and the respective control priority in
chapter Operating modes and master control function (Page 32).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 125
Commissioning
7.2 Sealing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters (optional)

7.2 Sealing 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters (optional)

Requirements
• Seal, sealing wire and a suitable sealing tool

Procedure

Illustration similar

1. Push the wire through the openings provided.

2. Seal the wire to secure the hinged cover against unauthorized opening.

Result
By sealing the hinged cover, the interface cover of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is protected
against unauthorized access. In addition, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and the
3RW5 communication module (where present) are protected against unauthorized removal. It
is still possible to operate the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.

Tip
If you install the 3RW5 HMI High Feature outside of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, use
an anti-tamper seal on the interface cover to protect the local interface and the slot of the
micro SD card from unauthorized access. Proceed in the same sequence as for sealing the spring
flap.
You will find more information in chapter Design and operator controls of the High Feature 3RW5
HMI (Page 98).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

126 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Commissioning
7.3 First commissioning of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

7.3 First commissioning of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

Requirements
• Power supply (control supply voltage) is connected for the first time or the factory settings
have been restored on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
• Design and operator controls of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 98)

Procedure
1. Select the desired language and confirm with the OK key.
2. Set the date and time and confirm the menu after setting the parameters with the right-hand
navigation key.
You can use the left-hand navigation key to switch back to language selection.
3. Save the settings by confirming one of the three following menu entries with the OK key or
exit the menu without saving the settings ("Don't save startup parameters and exit").
– "Save startup parameters and start application wizard"
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature switches to the application wizard (Page 92) menu.
– "Save startup parameters and start automatic parameterization"
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature switches to the automatic parameterization (Page 132)
menu.
– "Save startup parameters and exit"
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature switches to the operation display.

Result
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature is ready to use. You will find an overview of the functions in
chapter 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 28). Note the menu structure in chapter Menu of the
3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 99).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 127
Commissioning
7.3 First commissioning of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

128 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Functions 8
Overview of the described functions

Function Soft Starter

3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe
Parameter sets (Page 91) x x
Application wizard (Page 92) x x
Motor parameters (Page 95) x x
Startup (Page 131) x x
Automatic parameterization (Page 132) x x
Soft starting with voltage ramp (Page 134) x x
Soft starting with torque control (Page 137) x x
Soft starting with voltage ramp and current limiting x x
(Page 140)
Soft starting with torque control and current limiting x x
(Page 142)
Direct start (Page 143) x x
Motor heating (Page 143) x -
Breakaway pulse (Page 144) x x
Run-down (Page 146) x x
Coasting down (Page 148) x x
Voltage ramp (Page 149) x x
Torque control (Page 150) x x
Pump stopping mode (Page 152) x x
DC braking (Page 154) x -
DC braking with external braking contactors x -
(Page 154)
Dynamic DC braking without contactor (Page 157) x -
Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor as‐ x -
sembly (Page 160) (from firmware version V2.0)
Sensorless motor standstill detection (Page 162) x -
(from firmware version V2.0)
External motor standstill detection (Page 162) x -
Alternative stopping (Page 163) x x
Motor protection (Page 166) x x
Complete motor protection (Page 166) x x
Electronic motor overload protection (Page 166) x x
Temperature sensor (Page 169) x x
Intrinsic device protection (Page 171) x x
Creep speed (Page 172) x -

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 129
Functions

Function Soft Starter

3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe
Reset (Page 173) x x
Quick-stop (Page 174) x x
Condition monitoring (Page 174) x x
Current monitoring (Page 175) x x
Active power monitoring (Page 177) x x
Switching frequency monitoring (Page 178) x x
Starting time monitoring (Page 181) x x
Pump cleaning function (Page 182) x x
Asymmetry (Page 186) x x
Ground fault (Page 187) x x
Emergency mode (Page 189) x x
Emergency start (Page 189) x x
Emergency run (Page 191) x -
(from firmware version V2.1)
Inputs (Page 194) x x
Input actions (Page 194) x x
Process data and process images (Page 196) x x
Outputs (Page 198) x x
Digital outputs (Page 198) x x
Analog output (Page 202) x x
Cyclic send data (Page 205) x x
ATEX / IECEx (Page 206) x x
(from product version E02
and firmware version V2.0)
Failsafe (Page 212) - x
Functions under "Additional parameters" (Page 214) x x
Date and time (Page 218) x x
Trace (Page 220) x x
Test mode (Page 221) x x
Test with small load (Page 222) x x
Simulation (Page 224) x -
(from firmware version V2.1)
Monitoring (Page 227) x x
Control (Page 232) x x
Overview (Page 234) x x
Local access protection and user account administration x x
(Page 237)
Micro SD card (Page 243) x x
Self-test (user-test) (Page 264) x x
Logbooks (Page 265) x x
Service data (Page 266) x x
Firmware update (Page 275) x x

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

130 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

Function Soft Starter

3RW55 3RW55 Failsafe
Factory setting (Page 278) x x
Device change (Page 281) x x

8.1 Start-up

8.1.1 Starting modes

Operating principle
The starting mode of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters determines how the motor is
ramped up after the start command. You can set various starting modes.

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Starting modes of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

• Soft starting with voltage ramp (Page 134)
• Soft starting with torque control (Page 137)
• Soft starting with voltage ramp and current limiting (Page 140)
(Factory setting)
• Soft starting with torque control and current limiting (Page 142)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 131
Functions
8.1 Start-up

• Direct-on-line starting (Page 143)

• Motor heating (Page 143)
This starting mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Breakaway pulse
In connection with the 4 soft starting modes, you can set an advance breakaway pulse
(Page 144).

Tip
The Automatic parameterization (Page 132) supports you during commissioning and optimizes
the starting parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters each time the motor is
started.

8.1.2 Automatic parameterization

Operating principle
When automatic parameterization is activated, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
optimizes the starting parameters each time the motor is started. The recommended
parameters of the selected application are automatically accepted as the start value for
automatic parameterization.
For the PRESET starting time the ramp-up time is adopted as the start value and, for the current
limiting, the preset value of the application. The parameters are selected in such a way that the
motor starts immediately with minimum current and does not falter during start-up. Automatic
parameterization can be set for each of the parameter sets.

Adjustment of the parameters with automatic parameterization

As long as the "Automatic parameterization" function is active, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter monitors and analyzes the starting times and the starting currents at every start up.
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter always sets the selected starting mode to "Soft starting
with voltage ramp and current limiting (Page 140)". If another starting mode is required,
deactivate the automatic parameterization and modify the corresponding parameters.
The following parameters are also changed by the automatic parameterization and therefore
learned:
• Starting voltage
• Ramp up time
• Current limiting value

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

132 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

All further parameters are unaffected by the activated automatic parameterization and can still
be parameterized. In this way, parameters, such as Starting mode or breakaway pulse, can be set
independently of the Automatic parameterization.

Interaction with use of a 3RW5 communication module

To prevent the learned parameters from being overwritten by the starting parameters of the
higher-level control on each system restart, activate the parameter "Parameters of CPU/master
disabled" (Page 214).
You can find further information on the parameter "Parameters of CPU/master disabled" in the
manual for the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Automatic parameterization"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Procedure
To activate the Automatic parameterization, you must define the parameters "Rated operational
current Ie" and "Application":
1. Set the rated operational current Ie of the motor connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter.
If you have not yet set the rated operational current Ie of the motor, the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter uses the stored value of the factory setting. After the automatic
parameterization has been activated, an input prompt pops up for the rated operational
current Ie of the motor.
2. Choose the desired application with the menu item "Application".
3. If necessary, set the parameters "Mode", "Preset starting time" and "Current limiting value-
maximum".
4. Exit the menu for Automatic parameterization with the ESC key. Confirm the query "Save
parameter?" with the OK key.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Rated operational current Ie Depending on the rated operational current Ie of the motor connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter.
Application Selection of all supported applications.
When selecting the application, the recommended start values for the parameters "Preset
starting time" and "Current limiting value - maximum" are used, depending on the application.
You can find these values in the "Advanced parameters" menu. Change these values as re‐
quired.
The recommended application parameters for the first start of the automatic parameterization
are rough values for guidance. Change these values as required.
Advanced parameters

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 133
Functions
8.1 Start-up

Mode Select the mode depending on the selected application, depending on whether current limit‐
ing is recommended or not. You can change the mode manually at any time.
Off (factory setting)
The function is deactivated.
On - with preset starting time
The motor should have reached the rated operating speed after a specified starting time.
On - with preset starting time and current limiting
The motor should reach the rated operating speed after a specified starting time if the current
value is limited.
Preset starting time The time after which the motor should have reached its rated operating speed.
(Identical to the parameter of With the setting "0 s", there is no automatic parameterization.
the Starting time monitoring For the PRESET starting time the ramp-up time is adopted as the start value. Change the preset
(Page 181)) values as required.
• Factory setting: 4 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Current limiting value - maxi‐ This parameter only takes effect in connection with the parameter "Mode" (On - with preset
mum starting time and current limiting).
Depending on the selected application, the corresponding preset values are used for this
parameter. Change the preset values as required.
• Factory setting: 400%
• Setting range: 125 ... 800%
• In steps of: 1%

Result
Once the parameters have been stored, you can view the automatically determined values in the
parameter settings of the respective parameter set. If you deactivate automatic
parameterization, the stored values are no longer modified. The parameters learned in the
3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter are only overwritten if the device is parameterized again.

Deactivating automatic parameterization

To deactivate automatic parameterization, set the parameter "Mode" to "OFF".

8.1.3 Soft starting with voltage ramp

Operating principle
A voltage ramp is used to implement soft starting. The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
increases the motor voltage from a parameterizable starting voltage to the line voltage within a
definable ramp-up time.

Application
• E.g. pumps or small fans

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

134 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode >
Voltage ramp"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Voltage characteristic

8>9@

81

86

W>V@
W W

① Voltage ramp with short ramp-up time t1

② Voltage ramp with long ramp-up time t2
UN Line voltage
US Parameterizable starting voltage
t1 Short ramp-up time
t2 Long ramp-up time

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 135
Functions
8.1 Start-up

Torque curve

0>1P@

 



Q>PLQ@

① Torque with direct-on-line starting without 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
② Torque with short ramp-up time
③ Torque with long ramp-up time
④ Torque of the load
⑤ Acceleration torque = Difference between activation torque and torque of load

Current characteristic

,>$@





,H

Q>PLQ@
QH

① Current characteristic with direct-on-line starting without 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
② Current characteristic with short ramp-up time
③ Current characteristic with long ramp-up time
Ie Rated operational current during rated operation
ne Rated operating speed of the motor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

136 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

Parameters

Parameters Description
Starting voltage The starting voltage determines the starting torque of the motor. A lower starting voltage
results in a lower switch-on torque and a lower starting current. Select a starting voltage that
is high enough to ensure that the motor starts up immediately and smoothly when the start
command is issued to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Factory setting: 30%
• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
Ramp up time The ramp-up time determines the time taken to increase the motor voltage from the parame‐
terized starting voltage to the line voltage. This has an influence on the motor's acceleration
torque which drives the load during start-up. A longer ramp-up time results in a shorter ac‐
celeration torque across the motor ramp-up time. The motor runs up longer and more softly.
Set the ramp-up time so that the motor can reach its rated operating speed by the time the end
of the ramp-up reached. The actual motor starting time is load-dependent and can differ from
the parameterized ramp-up time.
If you choose a time that is too short, the ramp-up time ends before the motor has accelerated
to speed. A very high starting current that can reach the value of the direct starting current at
this speed then occurs. In this case, the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters can switch
themselves off via the internal overload protection function and signal a fault.
With the setting "0 s", the motor is switched on with a ramp-up time of approx. 100 ms.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Maximum starting time This time determines the period after which the drive must have completed its start-up. If the
drive is not yet operating under rated conditions after the specified interval has expired, the
generalized phase control of the thyristors is interrupted and the line voltage is raised to 100%.
The setting "0 s" deactivates the maximum starting time.
Maximum starting time ≥ ramp-up time.
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 1 000 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Breakaway time See Breakaway pulse for startup functions (Page 144)
Breakaway voltage

8.1.4 Soft starting with torque control

Operating principle
Torque control means that the torque generated in the motor is linearly increased from a
parameterizable starting torque up to a parameterizable end torque within an adjustable
starting time.
The advantage over a voltage ramp is the improved mechanical run-up behavior of the machine.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters control the torque generated at the motor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 137
Functions
8.1 Start-up

continuously and linearly according to the set parameters until the motor has completed its run-
up.
For optimum torque control during the starting procedure, enter the motor data of the motor
connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in the selected parameter set.

Application
• E.g. conveyor belts

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode >
Torque control"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Torque curve

0>1P@

0H 






Q>PLQ@
QH

① Torque with direct-on-line starting without 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
② Torque with short ramp-up time
③ Torque with long ramp-up time
④ Torque of the load
⑤ Acceleration torque = Difference between activation torque and torque of load
⑥ Parameterizable limiting torque
⑦ Parameterizable starting torque
Me Rated torque
ne Rated operating speed of the motor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

138 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

0>1P@

0H

 



W>V@
W W W

② Torque with short ramp-up time

③ Torque with long ramp-up time
④ Torque of the load
⑤ Acceleration torque = Difference between activation torque and torque of load
⑥ Parameterizable limiting torque
⑦ Parameterizable starting torque
t1 Parameterizable ramp-up time
t2 Motor has started up and is in rated operation. The start-up is detected and the bypass contacts
close
t3 Parameterizable ramp-up time
Me Rated torque

Parameters

Parameters Description
Starting torque The magnitude of the starting torque determines the switch-on torque of the motor. A lower
starting torque results in a lower switch-on torque and a lower starting current.
Select a starting torque that is high enough to ensure that the motor starts immediately and
smoothly when the start command is issued to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The
rated torque of the motor is used as the reference value.
• Factory setting: 10%
• Setting range: 10 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
Limiting torque The limiting torque value specifies the maximum torque to be generated in the motor during
start-up. This value also functions as an adjustable torque limit.
The parameter value should be set to approx. 150% to start the motor. It should be high enough
to ensure that the motor does not falter during start-up. This ensures that enough acceleration
torque is generated throughout the motor run-up phase. The rated torque of the motor is used
as the reference value.
Limiting torque ≥ starting torque
• Factory setting: 150%
• Setting range: 20 ... 200 %
• In steps of: 5%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 139
Functions
8.1 Start-up

Ramp up time The ramp-up time determines the time in which the starting torque is increased to the limiting
torque. This has an influence on the motor's acceleration torque which drives the load during
start-up. A longer ramp-up time results in a shorter acceleration torque across the motor ramp-
up time. The motor runs up longer and more softly.
The actual motor starting time is load-dependent and can differ from the parameterized ramp-
up time. If the starting time ends before the motor has completely ramped up, the torque is
limited to the set limiting torque until the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects that the
motor has ramped up and closes the internal bypass contacts.
With the setting "0 s", the motor is switched on with a ramp-up time of approx. 100 ms.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Maximum starting time This time determines the period after which the drive must have completed its start-up. If the
drive is not yet operating under rated conditions after the specified interval has expired, the
generalized phase control of the thyristors is interrupted and the line voltage is raised to 100%.
The setting "0 s" deactivates the maximum starting time.
Maximum starting time ≥ ramp-up time.
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 1 000 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Breakaway time See Breakaway pulse for startup functions (Page 144)
Breakaway voltage

8.1.5 Soft starting with voltage ramp and current limiting

Operating principle
Select the starting mode "Voltage ramp + Current limiting" if, at the same time as protecting the
system during startup, you want to ensure that a specific current value is not exceeded during
motor starting. The motor is always started up with the voltage ramp. If the current exceeds the
parameterized current limit, the voltage ramp is aborted and the current limitation function
starts. The current limitation function remains active until the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter detects that the motor has ramped up and the motor is in a normal operating state.

Application
• Avoiding current surges
• Reducing energy costs

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode >
Voltage ramp + Current limiting"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

140 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

Current characteristic

,>$@

,H

Q>PLQ@

① Current characteristic with direct-on-line starting without 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
② Adjustable current limiting value
③ Voltage ramp
Ie Rated operational current during rated operation

Parameters
In addition to the parameter below, the parameters of the starting mode "voltage ramp"
(Page 134) also apply.

Parameters Description
Current limiting value Set the current limiting value, as a factor of the rated motor current, to the maximum current
required during startup. If the set current limiting value has been reached, the motor voltage
is reduced or controlled by the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter to prevent the current
from exceeding the set current limiting value.
Select a minimum current limiting value that is high enough to ensure that the torque gener‐
ated in the motor is sufficient to accelerate the motor to nominal speed. 3 to 4 times the value
of the motor's rated operational current Ie can be assumed as typical here.
(Identical to the parameters in chapters Automatic parameterization (Page 132) and Soft
starting with torque control and current limiting (Page 142))
• Factory setting: 400%
• Setting range: 125 ... 800%
• In steps of: 1%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 141
Functions
8.1 Start-up

8.1.6 Soft starting with torque control and current limiting

Operating principle
Select the starting mode "Torque control + Current limiting" if, at the same time as protecting the
system during startup of the motor or the connected load, you want to ensure that a specific
current value is not exceeded. The motor is always started up with the torque control. If the
current exceeds the parameterized current limit, the torque ramp is aborted and the current
limitation function starts. The current limitation function remains active until the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects that the motor has ramped up and the motor is in a normal
operating state.

Application
• Avoiding current surges
• Reducing energy costs
• During heavy starting

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode >
Torque control + Current limiting"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Current characteristic

,>$@

,H

Q>PLQ@

① Current characteristic with direct-on-line starting without 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
② Adjustable current limiting value
③ Torque control
Ie Rated operational current during rated operation

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

142 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

Parameters
In addition to the parameter below, the parameters of the starting mode "torque control"
(Page 137) also apply.

Parameters Description
Current limiting value Set the current limiting value, as a factor of the rated motor current, to the maximum current
required during startup. If the set current limiting value has been reached, the motor voltage
is reduced or controlled by the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter to prevent the current
from exceeding the set current limiting value.
Select a minimum current limiting value that is high enough to ensure that the torque gener‐
ated in the motor is sufficient to accelerate the motor to nominal speed. 3 to 4 times the value
of the motor's rated operational current Ie can be assumed as typical here.
(Identical to the parameters in chapters Soft starting with voltage ramp and current limiting
(Page 140) and Automatic parameterization (Page 132))
• Factory setting: 400%
• Setting range: 125 ... 800%
• In steps of: 1%

8.1.7 Direct-on-line starting

Operating principle
The motor is switched on immediately without closed-loop control in the direction of rotation
(right/CW = line phase direction). Starting takes place without being influenced by Current
limiting by the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, for example. Current limiting is only
activated when 7.5 times the rated current of the soft starter is exceeded to avoid an overload.
If the starting mode "Direct" is set, a fast voltage ramp of approx. 100 ms will effected on a start
command. This limits the inrush current of the motor. After the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter has detected that the motor has ramped up, the bypasses are activated. This type of
starting is equivalent to the starting behavior with a contactor.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode >
Direct"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

8.1.8 Motor heating

Operating principle
The starting mode "motor heating" heats up the motor. No startup takes place. The motor
heating remains switched on for as long as the control command "Motor CW" or "Motor CCW" is
present.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 143
Functions
8.1 Start-up

Assign your own parameter set for the motor heating to enable you to switch quickly and easily
between the motor heating and the actual start-up.

Application
• Used for drives outdoors to minimize condensation inside the motor.

Validity
This starting mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings > Starting mode >
Motor heating"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Parameters

NOTICE
Damage to property through motor heating in continuous operation
The starting mode "motor heating" is not a continuous operating mode. The motor must be
equipped with a temperature sensor to ensure motor protection. The motor model with
integrated electronic motor overload protection is not suitable for this kind of operation.

Parameters Description
Motor heating power Set the parameter so that the motor is not damaged. 100% motor heating
power corresponds to a comparable motor current of about 30% of the
rated motor current.
• Factory setting: 20%
• Setting range: 1 ... 100%
• In steps of: 1%

8.1.9 Breakaway pulse for startup functions

Operating principle
It may be necessary to create a breakaway pulse at the beginning of the machine's starting
process. Using the breakaway pulse, the high limiting friction of the load can be overcome and
the machine can be set into motion. The breakaway pulse is used in conjunction with the starting
modes "Voltage ramp", "Torque control", or "Current limiting" and overlays this during the set
breakaway time.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

144 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.1 Start-up

Application
• Mills
• Crushers
• Drives with journal bearings

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Start settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Voltage characteristic

8>9@

81

86

W>V@
W W

① Voltage ramp
② Parameterizable breakaway voltage
t1 Breakaway time
t1 ... t2 Ramp up time
UN Line voltage
US Parameterizable starting voltage

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 145
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters

Parameters Description
Breakaway time The breakaway time determines the period during which the breakaway voltage is to be
present. Once the breakaway time has expired, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
begins start-up with the selected starting mode, e.g. voltage ramp or torque control.
Select a breakaway time that is at least long enough to ensure that, after the set time has
elapsed, the motor does not stop again but continues to accelerate in the selected starting
mode immediately. The setting "0 s" deactivates the function of the breakaway pulse.
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 2 s
• In steps of: 0.01 s
Breakaway voltage The breakaway voltage is used to set the breakaway torque to be generated. The breakaway
torque can be up to 100% of the switch-on torque generated during direct-on-line starting.
Select a breakaway voltage that is high enough to ensure that the motor starts rotating as soon
as the start command is issued to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Factory setting: 40%
• Setting range: 40 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%

8.2 Run-down

8.2.1 Stopping modes

Operating principle
Just like starting, stopping can also be adapted to the application:

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

146 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Stopping modes of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

• Coasting down (Page 148)
(Factory setting)
• Voltage ramp (Page 149)
• Torque control (Page 150)
• Pump stop (Page 152)
• DC braking with external braking contactors (Page 154)
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Dynamic DC braking without contactor (Page 157)
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor assembly (Page 160)
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Alternative stopping (Page 163)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 147
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Speed curve

Q>PLQ@

  

W>V@
W

① nDC braking
② nCoasting down
③ nTorque controlled stopping
t1 Stop command on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

8.2.2 Coasting down

Operating principle
Coasting down means the power supplied to the motor via the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter is interrupted when the ON command is removed from the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter. The motor will coast down freely without closed-loop control, driven only by the mass
inertia (centrifugal mass) of the rotor and load. This is also referred to as natural stopping. A
larger centrifugal mass means a longer stop time without load.
Coasting down is used for loads that make no special demand on the startup characteristic.

Application
• E.g. fan

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > Coasting down"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

148 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

8.2.3 Voltage ramp

Operating principle
With the stopping mode "Voltage ramp", the motor voltage is decreased along a linear, negative
voltage ramp until the motor has stopped.

Application
• Drives that stop abruptly when switched off, causing the transported goods to be damaged,
such as bottling plants.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > Voltage ramp"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Voltage characteristic

8>9@

81

86WRS

W>V@
W W

t1 ... t2 Stopping time

UN Line voltage
UStop Stop voltage (50% of the line voltage)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 149
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters

Parameters Description
Stopping time The stopping time defines the time within which the motor voltage is reduced from
line voltage to 0 V.
It may take longer for the motor to actually coast down to a standstill.
The setting "0 s" causes the motor to be shut down immediately without a down
ramp.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s

8.2.4 Torque control

Operating principle
Torque-controlled stopping extends the stopping of the load. The motor is powered down on a
linear, negative torque ramp. This function is activated if there is a need to prevent the load from
being stopped abruptly.

Application
• e.g. for conveyor belts, to prevent the conveyed materials from toppling.
• Applications with a low mass inertia or a high counter-torque.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > Torque control"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

150 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Torque curve

0>1P@

0H

W>V@
W W

① Stopping torque
t1 ... t2 Stopping time
Me Rated torque

Parameters

Note
Motor data
For optimum torque control during the stopping procedure, enter the motor data of the motor
connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in the selected parameter set using the
"Motor parameters" menu item.
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor parameters"

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 151
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters Description
Stopping time The stopping time defines the time within which the motor voltage is reduced
from line voltage to 0 V.
It may take longer for the motor to actually coast down to a standstill.
The setting "0 s" causes the motor to be shut down immediately without a
down ramp.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Stopping torque The motor torque is "controlled" until the stopping torque is reached and then
switched off. The rated torque of the motor is used as the reference value.
• Factory setting: 10%
• Setting range: 10 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%

8.2.5 Pump stop

Operating principle
With a torque-controlled pump stopping mode, stopping of the pump is prolonged. This
stopping mode is set if there is a need to prevent the pump from being stopped abruptly.
Due to the very low moment of inertia that always applies in pumps, the pump operating
mechanism (motor) can come to a standstill suddenly when shutting down, due to the counter-
pressure of fluid in the piping system. This can result in pressure fluctuations in the pipe system
which in turn cause loud noises (water hammer) and mechanical problems, e.g. to return valves.
For this reason, the flow rate of the pump is reduced gradually during pump stopping mode. In
the case of smaller pumps this effect can often be ignored.

Application
• Drives for which the abrupt stopping of the pump is to be prevented.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > Pump stopping mode"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

152 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Speed curve

Q>PLQ@

 

W>V@

① Stopping mode "Voltage ramp"

② Stopping mode "Pump stopping mode"

Parameters

Note
Motor data
For optimum torque control during the stopping procedure, enter the motor data of the motor
connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in the selected parameter set using the
"Motor parameters" menu item.
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor parameters"

Parameters Description
Stopping time The stopping time defines the time within which the motor voltage is reduced
from line voltage to 0 V.
It may take longer for the motor to actually coast down to a standstill.
The setting "0 s" causes the motor to be shut down immediately without a
down ramp.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Stopping torque The motor torque is "controlled" until the stopping torque is reached and then
switched off. The rated torque of the motor is used as the reference value.
• Factory setting: 10%
• Setting range: 10 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 153
Functions
8.2 Run-down

8.2.6 DC braking

8.2.6.1 DC braking with external braking contactors

Operating principle
In the case of DC braking, coasting down or the natural stopping of the load is shortened by
electrical braking using a brake contactor. The 3RW55 soft starter impresses a (pulsating) direct
current in phases L1 and L2 on the motor stator. This current generates a permanent magnetic
field in the stator. Since the rotor is still rotating due to its mass inertia, currents are induced in
the short-circuited rotor winding that generate a DC braking torque. If the braking process is not
completed on expiry of the stopping time, the motor coasts down.
To guarantee a premature cancellation of the braking process, the "External motor standstill
detection (Page 162)" or "Sensorless motor standstill detection (Page 162)" function can be used
to detect motor standstill before the stopping time has elapsed. As motor protection, the use of
the thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor (Page 169) is recommended.
If you use a 3RW55 soft starter with article number "3RW551.‑.....", "3RW5521‑....." or
"3RW5524‑....." with a rated operational voltage Ue up to 400 V, you can only implement the
stopping mode "DC braking" with an external braking contactor. Use 2 external braking
contactors for 3RW55 soft starters from article number "3RW5525‑....." or for a rated operational
voltage Ue larger than 400 V.
Note the technical data of the braking contactors. You will find further information on braking
contactors in Catalog IC 10 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747945).

Size Article number of the Number of required external Number of required exter‐
3RW55 soft starter braking contactors up to 400 V nal braking contactors
higher than 400 V
Size 1 3RW551.-..... 1 or 2 2
Size 2 3RW5521-.....
3RW5524-.....
3RW5525-..... 2
3RW5526-.....
3RW5527-.....
Size 3 3RW553.-.....
Size 4 3RW554.-.....
Size 5 3RW555.-.....

Application
• Stopping in applications with large mass inertia (centrifugal masses): Jload ≤ 5 x Jmotor
• Lathes (e.g. on a tool change)
• Circular saws
• Punches
• Conveyor belts

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

154 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Additional information
You will find further information on the operating principle in chapters 3RW55 soft starter in
standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC braking with one braking contactor
(Page 311) and 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC braking
with 2 braking contactors (Page 313).

Validity
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• In this braking variant, one output action of the 3RW55 soft starter must be changed over to
"DC brake contactor", through which an external braking contactor is controlled.
• 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit
• Ex operation not active

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > DC braking"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 155
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Torque characteristic without braking delay

0>1P@

0H

W>V@

W W

① DC braking torque
t1 Stop command on the 3RW55 soft starter
t1 ... t2 Stopping time
Me Rated torque

Torque characteristic with braking delay

0>1P@

0H

W>V@

 


① DC braking torque
② Stop command on the 3RW55 soft starter
③ DC braking delay (coasting down)
④ Stopping time
Me Rated torque

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

156 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters

NOTICE
Damage to property due to DC braking
DC braking causes a higher current load and motor-specific noises and vibrations.
This can lead to premature failure of motor bearings. It may be necessary to overdimension the
3RW55 soft starter.

Parameters Description
Stopping time On expiry of the stopping time, the DC braking procedure is automatically terminated. The
setting "0 s" causes the motor to shut down immediately without DC braking.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
DC braking torque The motor's braking force can be set with the magnitude of the DC braking torque.
• Factory setting: 50%
• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
DC braking delay The DC brake delay starts when the motor OFF command ("Motor CW" and "Motor CCW" = 0)
is detected. The motor coasts freely while the DC brake deceleration time elapses. After the DC
braking delay has elapsed, DC braking is started.
The motor brakes by free coasting, which means less energy is required for the following DC
braking. This reduces the risk that the 3RW55 soft starter may overheat during DC braking.
This parameter is used for "Stopping mode" and ignored for "Alternative stopping mode".
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s

8.2.6.2 Dynamic DC braking without contactor

Operating principle
Braking is performed in 2 phases. In the first phase the motor is braked by controlled DC braking
pulses. In the second phase, the motor is brought to a standstill with a constant DC braking. Use
DC braking if a uniformly long braking time is required.
To guarantee a premature cancellation of the braking process, the "External motor standstill
detection (Page 162)" or "Sensorless motor standstill detection (Page 162)" function can be used
to detect motor standstill before the stopping time has elapsed. As motor protection, the use of
the thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor (Page 169) is recommended.

Application
• Stopping in applications with small mass inertia (centrifugal masses): Jload ≤ Jmotor
• If an electrical braking process without braking contactor is required.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 157
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Validity
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit
• Ex operation not active

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > Dynamic DC braking"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Torque characteristic without braking delay

0>1P@

0H


W>V@

W W

① DC braking torque
② Dynamic braking torque
t1 Stop command on the 3RW55 soft starter
t1 ... t2 Stopping time
Me Rated torque

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

158 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Torque characteristic with braking delay

0>1P@

0H


W>V@

 

① DC braking torque
② Stop command on the 3RW55 soft starter
③ DC braking delay (coasting down)
④ Dynamic braking torque
⑤ Stopping time
Me Rated torque

Parameters

NOTICE
Property damage due to DC braking pulses
DC braking pulses cause a higher current load and motor-specific noises and vibrations.
This can lead to premature failure of motor bearings. It may be necessary to overdimension the
3RW55 soft starter.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 159
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters Description
Stopping time The stopping time specifies the period during which the DC braking torque is to be generated
on the motor. The chosen braking time should be long enough to bring the load to a standstill.
To achieve an adequate braking effect down to standstill, the centrifugal mass of the load
should not exceed that of the motor. The length of the stopping time should be chosen such
that the motor comes to a standstill.
The actual stopping time may vary with this braking process.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
DC braking torque With the DC braking torque, the braking force of the motor in the second phase of braking can
be set. The dynamic braking torque must be increased if the motor is to accelerate again during
DC braking.
• Factory setting: 50%
• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
Dynamic braking torque The dynamic braking torque determines the braking effect in the first phase of braking to
reduce the speed of the motor. After that, braking by DC braking is continued automatically.
• Factory setting: 50%
• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
DC braking delay The DC brake delay starts when the motor OFF command ("Motor CW" and "Motor CCW" = 0)
is detected. The motor coasts freely while the DC brake deceleration time elapses. The dynamic
DC braking is not started until the DC braking delay has elapsed.
The motor brakes by free coasting, which means less energy is required for subsequent dy‐
namic DC braking. This reduces the risk that the 3RW55 soft starter may overheat during
dynamic DC braking.
This parameter is used for "Stopping mode" and ignored for "Alternative stopping mode".
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s

8.2.6.3 Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor assembly

Operating principle
In the stopping mode "Reversing DC braking", the motor is strongly braked with an external
reversing contactor assembly. To avoid the motor turning in the opposite direction after braking,
braking is divided into 2 braking phases. In the first braking phase, the 3RW55 soft starter brakes
with reversing operation (external reversing contactor assembly), up to approx. 80% (factory
setting) of the energy has been reduced. This energy is determined by the 3RW55 soft starter
and corresponds to the starting energy. In the second braking phase, the 3RW55 soft starter
brakes by DC braking (without the DC braking contactor) and reduces the remaining 20% of the
energy. DC braking is brought to an end by standstill detection. Standstill detection requires use
of the function "External motor standstill detection (Page 162)" or "Sensorless motor standstill
detection (Page 162)".

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

160 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

The stopping mode "Reversing DC braking" with a reversing contactor assembly and the
"reversing operation" function use the same line contactors. You will find further information on
the method of operation in chapter Reversing duty (Page 322).

Application
• Applications that have to be braked quickly

Validity
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0
• External reversing contactor assembly comprising 2 mechanically interlocked contactors
• 2 digital outputs
• 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit
• Ex operation not active

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Stopping mode > Reversing DC braking"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Stopping time The length of the stopping time determines the duration of braking. The setting "0 s" causes
termination without DC braking.
• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Dynamic braking torque The dynamic braking torque determines the magnitude of the braking effect in the first braking
phase to reduce the speed of the motor via reversing operation. In this way, the duration of the
reversing operation in the first braking phase can be changed to avoid rotation in the opposite
direction after braking. If you want to prolong the first braking phase, increase the dynamic
braking torque, e.g. to 70%. If the motor rotates in the opposite direction after braking, reduce
the dynamic braking torque, e.g. to 30%. The factory setting 50% corresponds to a reduction
of approx. 80% of the energy in the first braking phase.
• Factory setting: 50%
• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 161
Functions
8.2 Run-down

8.2.6.4 Sensorless motor standstill detection

Operating principle
The 3RW55 soft starter features integrated sensorless motor standstill detection. With this
function, all stopping modes with braking can be brought to an end in good time as soon as the
motor is at a standstill. The function can also be used independently of the stopping mode.

Application
• Timely detection of motor standstill for terminating braking

Validity
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0
• Start-up completed
If standstill detection is required before start-up has been completed or in inching mode, use
a standstill monitoring function with an encoder.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Parameters

Parameters Meaning
Sensorless motor standstill detection • Activated (factory setting)
• Deactivated

8.2.6.5 External motor standstill detection

Operating principle
The 3RW55 soft starter detects standstill of the motor shaft by external motor standstill
detection. With this function, all stopping modes with braking can be brought to an end in good
time as soon as the motor is at a standstill. The function can also be used independently of the
stopping mode.

Application
• Timely detection of motor standstill for terminating braking

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

162 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Validity
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• External motor standstill detection
• Parameterize the input connected to the external motor standstill detection with the input
action "Motor standstill" (Page 194).

8.2.7 Alternative stopping

Operating principle
With the aid of a control command, you can switch from the parameterized stopping mode to
a parameterizable Alternative stopping mode. Every stopping mode can be combined with every
alternative stopping mode. The switchover to alternative stopping must take place before the
start of the planned stopping. You cannot switch to alternative stopping while stopping.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode settings >
Alternative stopping > Alternative stopping mode"
• Menu (Parameters): "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Stopping mode
settings > Alternative stopping"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 163
Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters

Parameters Description
Alternative stopping mode • Coasting down (Page 148) (factory setting).
• Voltage ramp (Page 149)
• Torque control (Page 150)
• Pump stopping mode (Page 152)
• DC braking1) (Page 154)
• Dynamic DC braking1) (Page 157)
• Reversing DC braking1) (Page 160)
Alternative stopping time Depending on the alternative stopping mode set, observe the description of the param‐
eter "Stopping time" in the relevant chapter:
• Voltage ramp (Page 149)
• Torque control (Page 150)
• Pump stopping mode (Page 152)
• DC braking (Page 154)
• Dynamic DC braking (Page 157)
• Reversing DC braking (Page 160)

• Factory setting: 10 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Alternative stopping torque Depending on the alternative stopping mode set, observe the description of the param‐
eter "Stopping torque" in the relevant chapter:
• Torque control (Page 150)
• Pump stopping mode (Page 152)
The motor torque is "controlled" until the alternative stopping torque is reached and then
switched off. The rated torque of the motor is used as the reference value.
• Factory setting: 10%
• Setting range: 10 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
Alternative dynamic braking torque Depending on the alternative stopping mode set, observe the description of the param‐
eter "Dynamic braking torque" in the relevant chapter:
• Dynamic DC braking (Page 157)
• Reversing DC braking (Page 160)

• Factory setting: 50%

• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

164 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.2 Run-down

Parameters Description
Alternative DC braking torque Irrespective of the set alternative stopping mode, not the description of the parameter
"DC braking torque" in the relevant chapter:
• DC braking (Page 154)
• Dynamic DC braking (Page 157)

• Factory setting: 50%

• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%
Alternative DC braking delay Depending on the alternative stopping mode set, observe the description of the param‐
eter "DC braking delay" in the relevant chapter:
• DC braking (Page 154)
• Dynamic DC braking (Page 157)

• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
1)
This stopping mode is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Switchover options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Control > Control motor > Enable / Disable alternative stopping mode"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 232).
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• Input action (Page 194)
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 165
Functions
8.3 Motor protection

8.3 Motor protection

The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have 2 functions for protecting the motor:
• Electronic motor overload protection
• Thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor
Use a combination of both of these functions to implement full motor protection.

NOTICE
Deactivated motor protection can cause material damage.
If the motor is not monitored by a temperature sensor and the trip class is set to "CLASS OFF",
no motor protection is provided.

Reset after cooling time

If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or intrinsic
device protection tripping operation, the action cannot be acknowledged using the "Reset"
function until the displayed cooling time has expired.
The behavior of the soft starter after an acknowledgment depends on the "Response to
overload ..." parameter set for the particular function.

8.3.1 Electronic motor overload protection

Operating principle
The electronic motor overload protection calculates the approximate temperature of the motor
from the measured motor currents and the device parameters "Rated operational current Ie" and
"Trip class". This indicates whether the motor is overloaded or is functioning in the normal
operating range. To do this, set the motor parameters (Page 95) of your motor.
The current motor temperature rise can be displayed via the measured value "Motor
temperature rise" (Page 227)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

166 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.3 Motor protection

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor protection > Electronic
motor overload protection"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor protection"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

WARNING
Automatic restart following error acknowledgment/restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters immediately continue to operate with the values
specified by the control following error acknowledgment / restart. Outputs are activated when
the ON condition is met.
Take appropriate measures to prevent unintentional restarting and to ensure a defined start of
the system.

Parameters Description
Trip class Deactivates the electronic motor overload protection. You will find further information
below the table.
• CLASS OFF
The tripping times correspond to the trip class. You will find further information below
the table.
• CLASS 10A
• CLASS 10E (factory setting)
• CLASS 20E
• CLASS 30E

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 167
Functions
8.3 Motor protection

Parameters Description
Warning limits Remaining time The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters can generate a warning before imminent
for tripping motor overload shutdown. The parameter "Remaining time for tripping" defines the time
between the warning and imminent motor overload shutdown. The instant of the im‐
minent motor overload shutdown is calculated on the assumption that the current op‐
erating conditions will continue. The setting "0 s" deactivates the function.
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 500 s
• In steps of: 1 s
The time until motor overload protection is tripped can be displayed via the measured
value "Remaining time for motor overload protection" (Page 227).
Temperature rise You use this parameter to preset a motor temperature rise value in percent as a warning
limit. The setting "0%" deactivates the function.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 99%
• In steps of: 1%
Response to overload thermal motor Use this device parameter to specify how the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are
model to respond to a motor overload:
• Turn off without restart (factory setting)
On the occurrence of the motor overload, an error is generated and the motor is
tripped. When the parameterized recovery time (cooling time) has elapsed, the error
and the trip can be acknowledged with the "Reset" function.
• Turn off with restart
On the occurrence of the motor overload, an error is generated and the motor is
tripped. When the parameterized recovery time (cooling time) has elapsed, the error
and the motor trip are automatically canceled.
Recovery time Minimum cooling down time for the motor after a motor overload trip. Reset signals
present during the recovery time have no effect.
• Factory setting: 300 s
• Setting range: 60 ... 1 800 s
• In steps of: 30 s
The remaining recovery time following a motor overload shutdown can be displayed via
the measured value "Remaining motor cooling time" (Page 227).
Non-volatile tripping status If non-volatile tripping status is activated, the current tripping status of the electronic
motor overload protection is stored in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The
current recovery time is only counted down after a motor overload shutdown if a supply
voltage (control supply voltage) is applied to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
If the supply voltage (control supply voltage) is switched off in this period, counting
down the recovery time is interrupted until the supply voltage (control supply voltage)
is applied again.
• Yes (factory setting)
• No

Trip class
The trip class (CLASS) specifies the maximum time within which a protective device must trip
from a cold state at 7.2 x the rated operational current Ie (motor protection to IEC 60947). The
trip class defines the starting time at a particular current before the trip occurs.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

168 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.3 Motor protection

You can set different tripping characteristics according to the startup class. The higher the class,
the longer the permitted starting time. You can find the graphic for the respective tripping
characteristic at the following link (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/25099/
char).

8.3.2 Temperature sensor

Operating principle
You can connect the temperature sensor of the motor to the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters and evaluate it. If a specific motor-dependent temperature is exceeded, the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter recognizes this and reacts accordingly. You can set the reaction.
2 different types of measuring sensor can be connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter:
• PTC thermistors type A
This sensor type is a temperature-dependent resistor.
• Thermoclick
This sensor type is a temperature-dependent switch.

Note
ATEX / IECEx-certified motor protection
For ATEX / IECEx-certified motor protection, use of the PTC type A sensor only is approved.

The sensor cables of PTC thermistors type A can be monitored for wire break and short-circuit.
You will find more information on the connection of the temperature sensor in chapter
Connecting the temperature sensor (Page 303).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 169
Functions
8.3 Motor protection

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor protection > Temperature
sensor"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Motor protection"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

WARNING
Automatic restart following fault acknowledgment/restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters immediately continue to operate with the values
specified by the control following error acknowledgment / restart. Outputs are activated when
the ON condition is met.
Take appropriate measures to prevent unintentional restarting and to ensure a defined start of
the system.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

170 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.4 Intrinsic device protection

Parameters Description
Temperature sensor 1)
Sensor type • Deactivated (factory setting)
The motor protection function is deactivated.
• Thermoclick
This sensor type is a temperature-dependent switch.
• PTC type A
This sensor type is a temperature-dependent resistor.
Response to overload temper‐ If the temperature sensor detects an overload on the motor, this is
ature sensor signaled to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. You can set the
response to this:
• Turn off without restart (factory setting)
On an overtemperature, an error is generated and the motor is
shut down. After the motor has cooled down, the error and the
trip can be acknowledged with the "Reset" function.
• Turn off with restart
On an overtemperature, an error is generated and the motor is
shut down. After the motor has cooled down, the error and the
motor trip are automatically canceled.
• Warn
On an overtemperature, only a warning is output. After the mo‐
tor has cooled down, the warning is canceled automatically.
1)
Generally valid parameter that can only be set in Parameter set 1.

8.4 Intrinsic device protection

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have integrated intrinsic device protection (power
semiconductors and bypasses) that prevents inadmissible thermal overloading of the switching
elements.
In order to protect the bypasses and power semiconductors, the startup and maximum
operational currents of the motor are limited and the temperature monitored if current
measurement is available. The intrinsic device protection does not protect from short-circuit
stress.
The current switching element heating can be displayed via the measured value "Switching
element heating" (Page 227)

Acknowledgment after cooling time has elapsed.

If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or intrinsic
device protection tripping operation, the action cannot be acknowledged using the "Reset"
(Page 173) function until the cooling time of the switching element has expired. The remaining
cooling time can be displayed via the measured value "Remaining switching element cooling
time" (Page 227).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 171
Functions
8.5 Creep speed

The behavior of the soft starter after an acknowledgment depends on the "Response to
overload ..." parameter set for the particular function. You can set the behavior of the "intrinsic
device protection" function via the menu "Additional parameters", see Chapter "Functions under
"Additional parameters" (Page 214)".

8.5 Creep speed

Operating principle
The "Creep speed" function enables the motor to be controlled at low speed in both directions
during operation. The result of this function, however, is that only a reduced torque can be
generated in the motor. Due to possible temperature rise of the motor, this function is not
suitable for continuous operation. As motor protection, the use of the thermistor motor
protection with temperature sensor (Page 169) is recommended. Furthermore, the creep speed
causes mechanical vibrations, which can reduce the lifetime of the bearings. In addition to the
set parameters, motor-specific characteristics and the connected load influence the speed
resulting from the "Creep speed" function and creep speed generated in the motor. The "creep
speed" function is active for as long as the "Creep speed" control command is set.
You will find more information in chapter 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit with soft
starting, soft stopping and the additional function "Creep speed" (Page 315).

Application
• In applications with a low counter-torque, e.g. positioning of machine tools.

Validity
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Creep speed"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter
> "Parameters" > Window "Work area" >"Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Creep speed"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

172 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.6 Reset

Parameters

Parameters Description
Creep speed factor right The speed is reduced by the creep speed factor, in other words the rotational speed in creep
Creep speed factor left speed mode is the quotient derived from rated operating speed and creep speed factor.
The "creep speed" function operates ideally at a creep speed factor of 7 ... 9.
• Factory setting: 7
• Setting range: 3 ... 21
• In steps of: 1
Creep speed torque right The torque generated in the motor is influenced with the creep speed torque. The maximum
Creep speed torque left torque that can be generated depends on the selected creep speed. 100% creep speed torque
corresponds to approximately 30% of the rated motor torque.
• Factory setting: 50%
• Setting range: 20 ... 100%
• In steps of: 5%

Switchover options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Control > Control motor > Enable / Disable creep speed"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 232).
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• Input action (Page 194)
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

8.6 Reset

Operating principle
You can acknowledge current errors with the "Reset" function once they have been remedied.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 173
Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Execution options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Menu: "Control > Reset"
– Configured function selection key F1-F9 (Page 117)
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS
communication module):
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– With the "Reset" command in data record 93

8.7 Quick-stop

Operating principle
You can assign the "Quick-stop" input action to the digital inputs (Page 194). With a Quick-stop
the motor is shut off in normal operation with the currently set stopping function. Quick-stop is
executed regardless of where master control lies and a group error is not signaled.
You can use the "Disable Quick-stop" (Page 232) command to deactivate execution of the "Quick-
stop" input action.

8.8 Condition Monitoring

8.8.1 Condition Monitoring for plant monitoring

Operating principle
Condition monitoring monitors your plant and is able to detect incipient wear at an early stage.
This enables you to avoid unplanned plant downtimes and loss of production. To do this, you can
specify the response to limit violations of the following functions:
• Current monitoring (Page 175)
• Active power monitoring (Page 177)
• Switching frequency monitoring (Page 178)
• Starting time monitoring (Page 181)
• Pump cleaning function (Page 182)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

174 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter
> "Parameters" > Window "Work area" >"Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition
Monitoring"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

8.8.2 Current monitoring

Operating principle
The current flow is influenced by the loading status of the motor.
• If the motor current is increased, this indicates bearing damage, for example.
• If a very low motor current is flowing, this can indicate a broken conveyor belt or a motor in
no-load operation.
• If a very high motor current is flowing, this can indicate a blocked system and an overloaded
motor.
The current monitoring is deactivated automatically during starting and stopping. The rated
operational current Ie acts as a reference value for the current limit monitoring function.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring > Current
monitoring"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 175
Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Parameters

Parameters Description
Upper limit
Upper limit - error If the current exceeds this limit, an error is generated and the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters behave as set in the parameter "Response to error". The setting "0%" deactivates the
monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 50 ... 400 %
• In steps of: 1%
Upper limit - maintenance de‐ If the current exceeds this limit, a warning is generated. The setting "0%" deactivates the
manded monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 50 ... 400 %
• In steps of: 1%
Response to error 1)
Do not turn off (factory setting)
On exceeding the "Upper limit - error" the motor is not turned off.
Turn off
On exceeding the "Upper limit - error" the motor is turned off.
Lower limit
Lower limit - error If the current fails to reach this lower limit, an error is generated and the 3RW55 and 3RW55
Failsafe soft starters behave as set in the parameter "Response to error". The setting "0%"
deactivates the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 19 ... 100%
• In steps of: 1%
Lower limit - maintenance de‐ If the current fails to reach this lower limit, a warning is generated. The setting "0%" deactivates
manded the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 19 ... 100%
• In steps of: 1%
Response to error1) Do not turn off (factory setting)
If the "Lower limit - error" is undershot, the motor is not turned off.
Turn off
If the "Lower limit - error" is undershot, the motor is turned off.
1)
Generally valid parameter that can only be set in Parameter set 1.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

176 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

8.8.3 Active power monitoring

Operating principle
The active power is influenced by the loading status of the motor. Depending on the limit that
is exceeded, a warning or an error is signaled. The active power monitoring is deactivated during
starting and stopping. The current active power heating can be displayed via the measured value
"Active power" (Page 227)

Application
• Load monitoring for over-dimensioned motors
• Detection of pumps running empty and avoidance of damage to pump gears
• Avoidance of load peaks
• Derivation of production quality data from energy data

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring > Active
power monitoring"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Reference value Set the rated motor power for the reference value. The rated motor power can be obtained
from the motor data. The following limits for active power monitoring refer to this reference
value (rated motor power). The setting "0 W" deactivates the active power monitoring.
• Factory setting: 0 W
• Setting range: 0 W ... 2 000 kW
• In steps of: 1 W
Upper limit
Upper limit - error If the active power exceeds this limit, an error is generated and the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters behave as set in the parameter "Response to error". The setting "0%" deactivates
the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 400%
• In steps of: 1%
Upper limit - maintenance de‐ If the active power exceeds this limit, a warning is generated. The setting "0%" deactivates the
manded monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 400%
• In steps of: 1%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 177
Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Parameters Description
Response to error1) Do not turn off (factory setting)
On exceeding the "Upper limit - error" the motor is not turned off.
Turn off
On exceeding the "Upper limit - error" the motor is turned off.
Lower limit
Lower limit - error If the active power fails to reach this lower limit, an error is generated and the 3RW55 and
3RW55 Failsafe soft starters behave as set in the parameter "Response to error". The setting
"0%" deactivates the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 100%
• In steps of: 1%
Lower limit - maintenance de‐ If the active power fails to reach this lower limit, a warning is generated. The setting "0%"
manded deactivates the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 100%
• In steps of: 1%
Response to error 1)
Do not turn off (factory setting)
If the "Lower limit - error" is undershot, the motor is not turned off.
Turn off
If the "Lower limit - error" is undershot, the motor is turned off.
1)
Generally valid parameter that can only be set in Parameter set 1.

8.8.4 Switching frequency monitoring

Operating principle
If motors are started frequently, this can cause the motor to overheat. The 3RW55 and 3RW55
Failsafe soft starters monitor the switching frequency in order to adhere to the waiting and
cooling times.

Application
• Prevention of process-related critical application states that occur as a result of too frequent
starting in conjunction with insufficient cooling time (Mode 1) or as a result of not observing
cooling times between 2 operating phases (Mode 2).
• For example, refrigeration compressors that have to remain switched off for a specific time
after reaching a maximum number of starts.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring > Switching
frequency monitoring"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

178 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Switching frequency monitoring - Mode 1 (ON - ON)


21

   Q  

W W W W W W W

ุ W

① Counter for the number of starts begins at "1".

n Maximum number of starts
t1 Switching frequency monitoring time t1
t2 Switching frequency monitoring time t2

Switching frequency monitoring - Mode 2 (OFF - ON)

21

   Q  

W W W W W W W

n Maximum number of starts

t1 Switching frequency monitoring time t1
t2 Switching frequency monitoring time t2

Parameters

Parameters Description
Switching frequency monitoring mode Deactivated (factory setting)
The switching frequency monitoring is deactivated.
Mode 1 (ON - ON)
The switching frequency monitoring always relates to the start time of the
preceding Motor ON command and the start time of the new Motor ON com‐
mand. Comparison of the switching frequency monitoring time t1 and t2 starts
as soon as an effective switch-on command is present.
Mode 2 (OFF - ON)
The switching frequency monitoring always relates to the end time of the
preceding Motor ON command (Motor OFF) and the starting time of the new
Motor ON command. Comparison of the switching frequency monitoring
time t1 and t2 starts as soon as a switch-on command is no longer present.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 179
Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Parameters Description
Switching frequency monitoring time t1 The time t1 selected must be shorter than the time t2 or it must be deactivated.
If the switching frequency monitoring time t1 according to the set mode is not
observed, the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters behave as set in the
parameter "Response to ON command during active monit. time".
The setting "0 s" deactivates the Switching frequency monitoring time t1.
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 65 535 s
• In steps of: 1 s
Switching frequency monitoring time t2 The time t2 selected must be longer than the time t1 or it must be deactivated.
The parameter is relevant in relation to the parameter "Maximum number of
starts".
The setting "0 s" deactivates the Switching frequency monitoring time t2.
• Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 65 535 s
• In steps of: 1 s
Maximum number of starts This parameter is only relevant in combination with the switching frequency
monitoring time t2. If the parameter "Switching frequency monitoring time t2"
is deactivated (0 s, factory setting), the parameter "Maximum number of
starts" is also deactivated.
The parameter "Maximum number of starts" determines the number of starts
for which the switching frequency monitoring time t2 according to the set
mode does not have to be observed. An internal counter counts the starts for
which the switching frequency monitoring time t2 is not observed. At the
latest upon reaching the maximum number of starts, the switching frequency
monitoring time t2 must be observed once. If the switching frequency moni‐
toring time t2 is observed before reaching the maximum number of starts, the
counter begins again at "1".
If, upon reaching the maximum number of starts, the switching frequency
monitoring time t2 according to the set mode is not observed, the 3RW55 and
3RW55 Failsafe soft starters behave as set in the parameter "Response to ON
command during active monit. time".
• Factory setting: 2
• Setting range: 2 ... 255
• In steps of: 1

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

180 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Parameters Description
Response to ON command during active mon‐ Turn off with restart
it. time If an ON command for the motor is issued before the switching frequency
monitoring time t1 or t2 elapses, an error is generated and the motor is not
switched on (internal trip command). The trip is not automatically acknowl‐
edged until t1 or t2 elapses, and the motor is switched on when an ON com‐
mand is still present.
The trip can be bypassed using the "Emergency start" (Page 189) function. If
the emergency start function is activated in advance, the motor is switched on
despite the error message.
Turn off without restart
If an ON command for the motor is issued before the switching frequency
monitoring time t1 or t2 elapses, an error is generated and the motor is not
switched on (internal trip command). The trip must be acknowledged with
the "Reset" (Page 173) function.
The trip can be bypassed using the "Emergency start" (Page 189) function. If
the emergency start function is activated in advance, the motor is switched on
despite the error message.
Warning without lock-out
If an ON command is issued for the motor before switching frequency moni‐
toring time t1 or t2 elapses, a warning is generated and the motor is switched
on normally and not locked.
Warning with lock-out (factory setting)
If an ON command is issued for the motor before switching frequency moni‐
toring time t1 or t2 elapses, a warning is generated and the motor is not
switched on and locked. If an ON command is still present, the motor is not
switched on until t1 or t2 elapses.

Measured value "Remaining switching frequency monit. time"

If the motor cannot be switched on until t1 or t2 elapses, the remaining time can be displayed via
the measured value "Remaining switching frequency monit. time" (Page 227).

8.8.5 Starting time monitoring

Operating principle
An over/undershoot of the preset starting time can indicate an overload or underload of the
system.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring > Starting
time monitoring"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 181
Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Parameters

Parameters Description
Preset starting time The following limits for starting time monitoring refer to this parameter.
(identical to the parameter of The setting "0 s" deactivates starting time monitoring.
the Automatic parameteriza‐ • Factory setting: 10 s
tion (Page 132))
• Setting range: 0 ... 360 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s
Upper limit - maintenance de‐ If the ACTUAL starting time exceeds this limit, a warning is generated. The motor is not shut off.
manded If this limit has not been exceeded at the end of the motor starting phase, then any pending
warning is reset.
The setting "0%" deactivates the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 400%
• In steps of: 1%
Lower limit - maintenance de‐ If the ACTUAL starting time fails to reach this lower limit, a warning is generated. The motor is
manded not shut off.
If this lower limit is reached at the end of the motor starting phase, then any pending warning
is reset.
The setting "0%" deactivates the monitoring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Setting range: 0 ... 100%
• In steps of: 1%

8.8.6 Pump cleaning function

Operating principle
The pump cleaning function provides support with maintaining pump systems by preventing an
imminent blockage or, up to a point, also clearing an existing blockage. Pump cleaning is only
possible if the pump is switched on, if one or both control commands "Motor CW" or "Motor CCW"
is present, and if there is no internal trip command (e.g. disconnection due to motor overload
trip) or the internal trip command is ignored by the "Emergency start" (Page 189) function.
Cancellation of the control command or occurrence of an internal trip command while
emergency start is inactive causes the pump cleaning process to be aborted.
You will find further information on the pump cleaning function in the Internet under the FAQs
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109761112).

Application
• Clearance of blockages and dirt from water pipes, filters, and pump blades

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

182 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Activation options
If the "Pump cleaning - mode" parameter is set to "Manual ", you can start and stop the pump
cleaning function as follows:
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Control > Control motor > Pump cleaning start / stop"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 232).
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• Input action (Page 194)
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Setting via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Parameter set 1 / 2 / 3 > Condition Monitoring > Pump
cleaning"
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Configuration of the system

If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects a configured reversing contactor assembly,
the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter automatically uses the "with reversing switching
element" option (pump cleaning "intense") when starting the pump cleaning function. If
the 3RW55 soft starter does not detect a configured reversing contactor assembly, it
automatically uses the "with creep speed" option (pump cleaning "light"). In this case,
the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter cannot start the pump cleaning function.
Depending on the requirement for the pump cleaning function, note the information on the
following pump applications:

Pump cleaning function with creep speed (Pump Cleaning "light")

This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
This type of cleaning is suitable for preventing larger deposits of dirt. If the 3RW55 soft starter
detects changes in the operational current, the cleaning can be started normally. There are,
however, restrictions in this case. The pump cleaning function with creep speed can be operated
in reversing mode only in the "Creep speed" (Page 172) function.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 183
Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

For the pump cleaning function with Creep speed, no further installations are required. You will
find further information in the circuit example Pump cleaning function with creep speed
(Page 318) and on the Internet under the FAQs (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109761112).

Pump cleaning function with reversing switching element (Pump Cleaning "intense")
This type of cleaning is capable of removing larger deposits of dirt on the impeller. For this
purpose, another reversing contactor assembly is connected upstream of the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter in order to start the motor at full speed and with 100% torque in the opposite
direction.
For the pump cleaning function with reversing switching element, further installations are
required. You will find further information in the circuit example Pump cleaning function with
reversing contactor (Page 320) and on the Internet under the FAQs (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109761112).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

184 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.8 Condition Monitoring

Diagram
The following diagram illustrates the sequence of a cycle:

 

3)

 

32II

35

   W>V@
     

21

2))

① Operation
② Operation / stopping
③ Start of the cleaning process with the set Pump cleaning - start/stop parameters
④ Pump cleaning - time
⑤ Pump cleaning - cycles
⑥ Pump cleaning start
⑦ Pump cleaning stop
⑧ End of the cycle or end of the cleaning operation after the last cycle
⑨ Operation starting
⑩ Monitoring time (3 x pump cleaning - time)
⑪ Pump cleaning active
PF Pump running forward
POff Pump is off
PR Pump running in reverse

Parameters

Parameters Description
Pump cleaning - mode Deactivated (factory setting)
The pump cleaning function is deactivated.
Manual
You can start and stop the pump cleaning function manually according to the
activation options.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 185
Functions
8.9 Asymmetry

Parameters Description
Pump cleaning - time During the cleaning time, the pump runs at reduced speed and the maximum
possible torque.
• Factory setting: 20 s
• Setting range: 1 ... 30 s
• In steps of: 1 s
Pump cleaning - cycles During a cycle, the pump rotation changes direction several times.
For parameter values "Pump cleaning - cycles" > 1, the following applies: After
completion of the cycle ⑧, the cleaning operation ③ is repeated until the set
number of cycles is reached. The "Starting" ⑨ mode is then normally contin‐
ued.
• Factory setting: 3
• Setting range: 1 ... 10
• In steps of: 1
Pump cleaning - start/stop parameters You can select the parameters for starting and stopping the pump for different
cleaning processes here. For example, you can make different settings for
starting and stopping in parameter set 2 than for the normal starting and
stopping procedure.
Parameter set 1
The pump cleaning function is carried out with the starting and stopping pa‐
rameters of parameter set 1.
Parameter set 2
The pump cleaning function is carried out with the starting and stopping pa‐
rameters of parameter set 2.
Parameter set 3
The pump cleaning function is carried out with the starting and stopping pa‐
rameters of parameter set 3.
Operating parameters (factory setting)
The pump cleaning function is carried out with the starting and stopping pa‐
rameters of the currently selected parameter set.

8.9 Asymmetry

Operating principle
In certain phases of the motor, an asymmetrical current consumption can cause a reduction in
power or damage to the motor. Possible causes for this are a different line or phase voltage or an
already damaged motor winding. The asymmetry monitoring monitors the 3 phase currents and
issues a warning or switches the motor off at parameterizable limits. The current asymmetry can
be displayed via the measured value "Asymmetry" (Page 227)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

186 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.10 Ground fault

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Asymmetry"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Asymmetry"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Asymmetry limit warning If the asymmetry exceeds this limit, a warning is generated and the motor continues to run. The
setting "0%" deactivates the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Limit: 10 ... 60%
• In steps of: 5%
Asymmetry limit error If the asymmetry exceeds this limit, an error is generated and the motor is switched off. The
setting "0%" deactivates the limit value.
• Factory setting: 30%
• Limit: 10 ... 60%
• In steps of: 5%

8.10 Ground fault

Operating principle
The "Ground fault" function of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters measures and
monitors all 3 phase currents. By evaluating the summation current of the 3 current values, the
motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or ground fault.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 187
Functions
8.10 Ground fault

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Ground fault"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Ground fault"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Ground fault limit warning If the ground fault current in relation to the rated operational current Ie exceeds this limit, a
warning is generated and the motor continues to run. The setting "0%" deactivates the moni‐
toring of the limit value.
• Factory setting: 0%
• Limit: 10 ... 95%
• In steps of: 5%
Ground fault limit error If the ground fault current in relation to the rated operational current Ie exceeds this limit, an
error is generated and the motor is shut off. The setting "0%" deactivates the monitoring of the
limit value.
• Factory setting: 20%
• Limit: 10 ... 95%
• In steps of: 5%

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

188 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.11 Emergency mode

8.11 Emergency mode

8.11.1 Emergency start

Operating principle
The system can continue to be operated in the case of system faults with the "emergency start"
function. This is necessary for systems in which the product becomes unusable without
continued operation, e.g. glue and paint production. In crusher plants, in which a disconnection
makes any further startup impossible in certain situations, continued operation is also
necessary.
The emergency start is activated only if it has been enabled and a trip command exists due to a
system fault. The motor is switched on by means of a normal control command.

NOTICE
Damage to the system
If the Emergency start function is activated, both system defects and system protection
messages are ignored. This can cause further damage in the system.

In the case of some faults, the motor can be started via the "Emergency start" function despite
a pending group error:
• Phase asymmetry limit exceeded
• Electronic motor overload protection
• Temperature sensor wire break
• Temperature sensor short-circuit
• Temperature sensor overload
• Maximum starting time exceeded
• Ie limit value exceeded/undershot
• Ground fault detected

Requirements
• Ex operation not active

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 189
Functions
8.11 Emergency mode

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Emergency mode > Emergency start"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Emergency mode"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Emergency start Disable
The "Emergency start" function is disabled. Activation of the emergency start
is not possible.
Manually enable/disable (factory setting)
The "Emergency start" function can be enabled or disabled manually.
In the event of device faults, intrinsic device protective shutdown, process
mapping errors or stall protection, no emergency start is possible, even if
emergency start has been enabled.

Activation options
If the "Emergency start" parameter is set to "Manually enable/disable", you can enable and
disable the "Emergency start function" as follows:
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Control > Enable Emergency start / stop"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 232).
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

190 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.11 Emergency mode

• Input action (Page 194)

Note
If the control source is "Digital input", only a normally open contact may be connected to this
input. A normally closed contact would result in activation of the emergency start in the
event of a wire break.

• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:

– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

8.11.2 Emergency run

Operating principle
With the "Emergency run" function, the 3RW55 soft starter can continue to run with restricted
functionality after failure of a power semiconductor. This avoids plant shutdown and ensures
restricted operation of the motor and plant.
You set the behavior of the "Emergency run" function with the "Emergency run" parameter. The
"Emergency run" function is disabled in the factory setting, making activation of the emergency
run impossible. The "Emergency run" function can be enabled in every operating state. The
function is not active before the failure of a power semiconductor and has no impact on the
functions of the 3RW55 soft starter.

Effects of the emergency run on the 3RW55 soft starter

The 3RW55 soft starter makes parameter changes automatically when the emergency run
(failure of a power semiconductor) is active. Parameter assignments and function settings that
are not possible when the emergency run (failure of a power semiconductor) is active are not
implemented by the 3RW55 soft starter. After the "Emergency run" function has been disabled
(parameter) or deactivated (command / control command), the parameter assignments and
function settings are implemented again. The following functions are not supported when the
emergency run is active:
• Inside-delta circuit
• DC braking with external braking contactors
• Dynamic DC braking without contactor
• Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor assembly
• Creep speed

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 191
Functions
8.11 Emergency mode

• Motor heating
• Operation at a rated operational voltage Ue of 690 V
The 3RW55 soft starter's intrinsic device protection remains active when an active emergency
run (failure of a power semiconductor) is active. This ensures that no consequential damage
arises due to use of the "Emergency run" function if the motor and the plant continue to be
operated.

Application
• Avoiding unwanted plant standstills and failures

Validity
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1
• Ex operation not active

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Emergency mode > Emergency run"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Emergency mode"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

192 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.11 Emergency mode

Parameter

Parameter Description
Emergency run Disable (factory setting)
The "Emergency run" function is disabled. Activation of the emergency run is not possible. If the
3RW55 soft starter detects a failed power semiconductor, it generates an error with trip command
and the message text "Switching element L* failed".
Manually enable/disable
The "Emergency run" function can be manually enabled or disabled using command / control com‐
mand.
• Manual enabling following failure of a power semiconductor:
If the 3RW55 soft starter detects a failed power semiconductor, it generates an error with trip
command and the message text "Switching element L* failed". You can use the command /
control command "Enable emergency run" (Page 232) to activate the emergency run. Activation
of the emergency run results in the error being acknowledged and the 3RW55 soft starter
switches back into the previously active operating state. The active emergency run is accompa‐
nied by a warning with the following message text "2-phase control with defective thyristor
active".
• Manual enabling prior to failure of a power semiconductor:
In the event of the failure of a power semiconductor, the 3RW55 soft starter responds in the same
way as when the "Emergency run" parameter is set to "Enabled".
An active emergency run (failure of a power semiconductor) is not stored with non-volatile tripping
status in the 3RW55 soft starter. The emergency run remains active until the command / control
command is revoked ("Disable emergency run"), the "Emergency run" function (parameter) is deac‐
tivated or the supply voltage (control supply voltage) is switched off.
Enable
The "Emergency run" function is enabled. If the 3RW55 soft starter detects a failed power semicon‐
ductor, the emergency run is activated automatically and the 3RW55 soft starter generates a warning
with the message text "2-phase control with defective thyristor active".
If the motor is starting during the failure of a power semiconductor, starting is aborted and the motor
restarted with a 2-phase control. This can effect the motor by causing bucking or a drop in operating
speed.
If the motor is in run-down during the failure of a power semiconductor, the run-down is terminated
with the stopping mode "Coasting down". Only then can the stopping modes "Voltage ramp", "Torque
control" or "Pump stopping mode" be parameterized again. If one of the 3 DC braking modes is
parameterized as the stopping mode, the 3RW55 soft starter alternatively uses the stopping mode
"Coasting down".
The active emergency run (failure of a power semiconductor) is not stored with non-volatile tripping
status in the 3RW55 soft starter. The emergency run remains active until the function is disabled or
the failed power semiconductor has been replaced.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 193
Functions
8.12 Inputs

Activation options
If the "Emergency run" parameter is set to "Manually enable/disable", you can activate and
deactivate the emergency run in the event of a failed power semiconductor as follows:
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Control > Enable / Disable emergency run"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 232).
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– With the commands "Enable emergency run" or "Disable emergency run" in data record 93
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

8.12 Inputs

8.12.1 Overview of the input functions

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have 4 digital inputs DI1 ... DI4 to which you can
assign an input action. The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter also has a failsafe digital input (F‑DI). This
input cannot be parameterized.
Inputs with the input actions "Motor CW with PSx" or "Motor CCW with PSx" have AND
connection. If multiple inputs are assigned the same input action (e.g. Input 1 and Input 2 are
assigned the input action "Motor CW with PS1"), all of these inputs have to be activated for the
start command to be accepted.
Inputs with other input actions have OR connections. If multiple inputs are assigned the same
input action (e.g. Input 1 and Input 2 are assigned the input action "Emergency start"), only one
of these inputs has to be activated for the function to be executed.

Requirements
You can only modify an input action if the relevant input is not active.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

194 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.12 Inputs

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Inputs"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Inputs"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

Input action Description Factory setting

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4
No action Input has no function. - x x -
Operating mode man‐ You can only control the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter locally via - - - -
ual - local the local interface, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature or via the digital inputs.
Emergency start In the case of some errors, the motor can be started via the "Emergency - - - -
start" function despite a pending group error: One input is assigned the
action "Emergency start" and a further input, for example the action
"Motor CW with Parameter set 1". The emergency start is active as long
as the input is activated. The emergency start can also be activated
during operation.
You will find more information in chapter Emergency start (Page 189).
Creep speed 1)
The motor starts with the values set in the "Creep speed parameters" - - - -
menu item when the "Creep speed" input and the "Motor CW/CCW with
Parameter set 1/2/3" input are activated at the same time.
You will find more information in chapter Creep speed (Page 172).
Quick-stop If the input is activated, normal tripping of the motor with the currently - - - -
set stopping function is executed.
You will find more information in chapter Quick-stop (Page 174).
Reset You can acknowledge the fault after it has been remedied. - - - x
The "Reset" input is edge-controlled. The level change from 0 to 24 V DC
is evaluated at the input. All other input functions are evaluated at the
already pending 24 V DC level.
You will find more information in chapter Reset (Page 173).
Motor with parameter set 1 The motor starts with rotation in line phase direction and x - - -
CW with parameter set 2 stops with the values stored in the respective parameter - - - -
set.
with parameter set 3 - - - -

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 195
Functions
8.12 Inputs

Input action Description Factory setting

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4
Motor with parameter set 1 This function is active only when the "Creep speed" pa‐ - - - -
CCW with parameter set 2 rameter or reversing mode with external reversing switch‐ - - - -
ing elements is active at the same time. The motor starts
with parameter set 3 with the values stored in the "Creep speed parameters" - - - -
menu item (with rotation opposite to the line phase direc‐
tion).
Motor standstill1) The 3RW55 soft starter evaluates the signal from an external motor - - - -
standstill detection at the input.
You will find more information in chapter External motor standstill de‐
tection (Page 162).
Use alternative stop‐ You will find more information in chapter Alternative stopping - - - -
ping mode (Page 163).
Start pump cleaning You will find more information in chapter Pump cleaning function - - - -
(Page 182).
1)
Input action is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

8.12.2 Process data and process images

The basic functions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are controlled and monitored
in the process data in the process images.
The process images can be transferred as follows:
• Cyclically in the fieldbus protocol
• Acyclically using data sets

Process image input (PII) and process image output (PIQ)

The following process images are transferred:
• Process image input with 16 bytes
• Process image output with 4 bytes
The tables for the process images describe only the supported process data. Inputs and outputs
that are not listed are not assigned.

Process image input (PII)

Process data Process image

DI 0.0 Ready (automatic)
DI 0.1 Motor On
DI 0.2 Group error
DI 0.3 Group warning
DI 0.4 Input 1
DI 0.5 Input 2

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

196 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.12 Inputs

Process data Process image

DI 0.6 Input 3
DI 0.7 Input 4
DI 1.0 Motor current Iact-bit0
DI 1.1 Motor current Iact-bit1
DI 1.2 Motor current Iact-bit2
DI 1.3 Motor current Iact-bit3
DI 1.4 Motor current Iact-bit4
DI 1.5 Motor current Iact-bit5
DI 1.6 Operating mode manual - local
DI 1.7 Ramp operation
DI 2.0 Motor CW
DI 2.1 Motor CCW
DI 2.4 Starting mode active
DI 2.5 Operation / bypass active
DI 2.6 Stopping mode active
DI 2.7 Test mode active
DI 3.0 Thermal motor model overload
DI 3.1 Temperature sensor overload
DI 3.2 Switching element overload
DI 3.3 Cooling time active
DI 3.4 Device error
DI 3.5 Automatic parameterization active
DI 3.6 New Ex parameter values detected1)
AI 4 (Float32) Measured value 1 You will find further information on
AI 8 (Float32) Measured value 2 the settable measured values in chap‐
ter Cyclic send data (Page 205).
AI 12 (Float32) Measured value 3
1)
3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter from firmware
version V1.0

Process image output (PIQ)

Process data Process image

DQ 0.0 Motor CW
DQ 0.1 Motor CCW
DQ 0.3 Reset1)
DQ 0.4 Emergency start2)
DQ 0.5 Self-test (user-test)
DQ 0.6 Creep speed3)
DQ 1.0 Output 14), 5)
DQ 1.1 Output 24), 5)
DQ 1.2 Parameter set bit 06)
DQ 1.3 Parameter set bit 16)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 197
Functions
8.13 Outputs

Process data Process image

DQ 1.7 Disable Quick-stop
DQ 2.0 Output 33), 4)
DQ 2.3 Start pump cleaning
DQ 3.0 Manual operation local - Input controlled
DQ 3.1 Use alternative stopping mode
DQ 3.2 Motor standstill3)
1)
In order to perform the reset reliably, the control command "Reset" must be present for at least 20 ms.
2)
Control data is relevant for Ex applications.
3)
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
4)
You can assign the control data "Output 1", "Output 2" and "Output 3" to the digital outputs 1, 2 and 4
of the 3RW55 soft starter in any order via the digital output actions.
5)
You can assign the control data "Output 1" and "Output 2" to the digital outputs 1 and 2 of the 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter in any order via the digital output actions.
6)
Explanation in the following table.

Additional information
The following table describes the assignment of the process images "Parameter set bit 0" and
"Parameter set bit 1":

Assignment of the PIQ bits Parameter set bit 0 Parameter set bit 1
Process image error 1 1
Parameter set 1 (PS1) 0 0
Parameter set 2 (PS2) 1 0
Parameter set 3 (PS3) 0 1

8.13 Outputs

8.13.1 Digital outputs

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have 4 digital outputs (DQ1 = output 13, 14; DQ2 =
output 23, 24; DQ3 = output 95, 96, 98; DQ4 = output 43, 44 or output 41, 42 (F‑RQ)) (Page 71)
with which external actuators such as a brake contactor or indicator lamp can be activated.
Using the output actions, you can assign an output action to the digital outputs. Digital output 3
is permanently assigned to the output action "Group error". The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter has a
safety signaling output (output 4, F‑RQ) (Page 73). This output cannot be parameterized. The
remaining outputs of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters can be assigned an output
action independently of one another.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

198 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.13 Outputs

State diagram of the outputs

*HQHUDOIDXOWEXVIDXOWRUGHYLFHIDXOWRFFXUVVRIW
VWDUWHUVZLWFKHVRIIDQGHQWHUVIDXOWVWDWH

&RQWUROVXSSO\YROWDJHDW $XWRPDWLFUHVWDUWLQJRQ 6RIWVWDUWHUKDVGHWHFWHGUXQXS

WHUPLQDO$$ 6RIWVWDUWHUKDVGHWHFWHGUXQXS 5(6(7
6WRS
FRPPDQG
5DPSFXUYHRIVRIW 6WDUWFRPPDQG
VWDUWHU

,1,1
6WDUWFRPPDQG
,QSXW,QSXW

6WDUWXS
2SHUDWLRQ
E\SDVV

6WRSSLQJ

21
WLPH
&RPPDQG
PRWRU2Q
$SSUR[VGHOD\
'&EUDNLQJ
2XWSXWIXQFWLRQ

3RZHU2Q
*HQHUDO
ZDUQLQJ
*HQHUDOIDXOW

%XVHUURU

'HYLFHHUURU

5HDG\WRVWDUW

:DUQLQJLVSHQGLQJ :DUQLQJ )DXOWUHVHW :DUQLQJLVSHQGLQJ :DUQLQJ )DXOWUHVHWFRPPDQG

IDXOW FRPPDQG IDXOW
)DXOWRFFXUV GLVDSSHDUV )DXOWRFFXUV GLVDSSHDUV
7KHVHWZRRXWSXWIXQFWLRQVFDQEHFRQWUROOHGYLDWKHRSWLRQDO
3,4'4
ILHOGEXV
3,4'4

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 199
Functions
8.13 Outputs

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Outputs"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Outputs > Soft Starter"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameter - Delay

Parameters Description
ON delay time The switching of the output is delayed by this time.
OFF delay time • Factory setting: 0 s
• Setting range: 0 ... 6 500 s
• In steps of: 0.1 s

Parameter - Output action

Output action Description Factory setting

DQ1 DQ2 DQ31) DQ42)
No action - - x - x
Activation by external control sources
Control source PIQ-DQ-1.0 output 1 The control command "Output 1" is assigned to the - - - -
corresponding digital output.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Fea‐
ture (Page 232).
Control source PIQ-DQ-1.1 output 2 The control command "Output 2" is assigned to the - - - -
corresponding digital output.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Fea‐
ture (Page 232).
Control source PIQ-DQ-2.0 output 33) The control command "Output 3" is assigned to the - - - -
corresponding digital output.
Refer to chapter Control via 3RW5 HMI High Fea‐
ture (Page 232).
Control source input 1 Digital output is activated by "Digital input 1". - - - -

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

200 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.13 Outputs

Output action Description Factory setting

DQ1 DQ2 DQ31) DQ42)
Control source input 2 Digital output is activated by "Digital input 2". - - - -
Control source input 3 Digital output is activated by "Digital input 3". - - - -
Control source input 4 Digital output is activated by "Digital input 4". - - - -
Activation by means of soft starter
Start-up For further information, refer to the diagram in - - - -
Operation / bypass chapter Operating principle (Page 25). - - - -
Stopping - - - -
On time motor (RUN) x - - -
Operation / Run-down - - - -
Control command MOTOR ON (ON) The output is activated for as long as the control - - - -
command "Motor CW" or "Motor CCW" is present.
DC brake contactor3) The output action controls a DC braking contactor - - - -
via this output.
You will find more information in chapter DC brak‐
ing with external braking contactors (Page 154).
Device ON The output is active for as long as the electronic - - - -
supply is present at the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter.
Activation by signals from the soft starter
Group warning Group signals - - - -
Group error - - x -
Bus error - - - -
Device error - - - -
Reversing switching element - right The internal control signal for the reversing func‐ - - - -
Reversing switching element - left tion is assigned to the corresponding digital out‐ - - - -
put of the soft starter.
Generator operation Status messages - - - -
Ready to start for motor ON - - - -
Pump cleaning active - - - -
Alternative stopping mode active - - - -
External bypass 3), 4)
- - - -
CM - maintenance demanded - - - -
CM - error - - - -
1)
Permanently set to the output action "Group error".
2)
For 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters, this is the safety signaling output (output 4, F‑RQ). This output cannot be parameterized.
3)
Output action is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
4)
3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 201
Functions
8.13 Outputs

8.13.2 Analog output

Operating principle
The set measured value is displayed via the analog output using an external evaluation unit.
Depending on the respective connecting terminal being used, the signal can be displayed either
as current or voltage.
• Terminals: AQ- / AQ I+
Measuring range of current output: 4 - 20 mA
• Terminals: AQ- / AQ U+
Measuring range of voltage output: 0 - 10 V

Requirements
Evaluation unit is connected properly (Page 304).

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Outputs > Analog output"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Outputs > Soft Starter > Analog output"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

202 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.13 Outputs

Parameters

Parameters Description
Output signal type Via the "Output signal type" parameter, you can define with what type of signal
the analog value will be output (current or voltage).
• Deactivated (factory setting)
• 4 ... 20 mA
• 0 ... 10 V
Measured value Select the measured value to be transferred from the analog output via the
"Measured value" parameter.
• Deactivated
• Phase current I L1 (%)
• Phase current I L2 (%)
• Phase current I L3 (%)
• Phase current average (%)
• Phase current I L1 (rms)
• Phase current I L2 (rms)
• Phase current I L3 (rms)
• Phase current average (rms)
• Line voltage U L1-L2 (rms)
• Line voltage U L2-L3 (rms)
• Line voltage U L3-L1 (rms)
• Active power
• Power factor L1...3
• Active energy import (total)
• Motor temperature rise
• Switching element heating
You will find further information in chapter "Monitoring the measured values
of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 227)".
Range start value With parameters "Range start value" and "Range end value", you can define
Range end value which value of the analog value to be output corresponds to the lower output
signal value and which to the upper output signal value. The corresponding
value depends on the coding of the measured value to be transferred (Un‐
signed 32).
• Setting of the analog range, e.g. 4 mA = 100
• Setting of the analog range, e.g. 20 mA = 400

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 203
Functions
8.13 Outputs

Factors for calculating the output measured value

Measured value Factor Unit Range of values Coding

• Phase current I L1 (%) 3.125 % 0 … 796.9% 0 ... 255
• Phase current I L2 (%)
• Phase current I L3 (%)
• Phase current average (%)
• Motor temperature rise 1 % 0 … 1 000% 0 ... 1 000
• Switching element heating 1 % 0 … 250% 0 ... 250
• Line voltage U L1-L2 (rms) 0.1 V 0 … 1 500 V 0 ... 15 000
• Line voltage U L2-L3 (rms)
• Line voltage U L3-L1 (rms)
• Phase current I L1 (rms) 0.01 A 0 … 20 000 A 0 ... 2 000 000
• Phase current I L2 (rms)
• Phase current I L3 (rms)
• Phase current average (rms)
• Power factor L1...3 0.01 - 0…1 0 ... 100
• Active power 0.0001 kW 0 … 2 147.483 kW 0 ... 21 474 830
• Active energy import (total) 1 Wh 0 ... 3.4 x 10 Wh
38
0 ... 3.4 x 1038

Example of calculating the parameters for the range start value and range end value
In this example, a pointer instrument indicates the measured value "Phase current I L1 (rms)"
50 A (start value) at the left stop and 150 A (end value) at the right stop. You can divide the scale
of the pointer instrument between the left stop and the right stop, depending on the desired
resolution.
The following measured values and parameters are given as examples at this point:
• Output signal type: 4 ... 20 mA
• Measured value: Phase current I L1 (rms)
• Range start value = desired start value (e.g. 50 A) / factor of the measured value in question
• Range end value = desired end value (e.g. 150 A) / factor of the measured value in question

Procedure
1. Parameterize the output signal type, e.g. 4 ... 20 mA.
2. Select a measured value, e.g.: Phase current I L1 (rms)
3. Parameterize the range start value and the range end value taking the relevant factor into
account:
– Range start value (e.g. 50 A / 0.01 A) → 5 000
– Range end value (e.g. 150 A / 0.01 A) → 15 000

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

204 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.13 Outputs

Result
You have adjusted the output signal of the analog output.

PLC at analog output

You can connect the analog output of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to a free
analog input of the PLC. Make sure that the analog input of the PLC is not connected to the supply
voltage (control supply voltage) of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and is floating.

8.13.3 Cyclic send data

Operating principle
In the process image input (PII) (Page 196), 3 measured values are transferred that you can
parameterize.

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Outputs > Cyclic send data"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Outputs > Cyclic send data"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 205
Functions
8.14 ATEX / IECEx

Parameters

Parameters Description
Measured value 1 For "Measured value 1", "Measured value 2" and "Measured value 3"
Measured value 2 specify one measured value in each case:
Measured value 3 • Phase current I L1 (rms) (factory setting measured value 1)
• Phase current I L2 (rms) (factory setting measured value 2)
• Phase current I L3 (rms) (factory setting measured value 3)
• Power factor L1...3
• Phase current average (rms)
• Active energy import (total)
• Active power

8.14 ATEX / IECEx

8.14.1 ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection

Observe the safety instructions in chapter ATEX / IECEx (Page 16).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

206 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.14 ATEX / IECEx

8.14.2 Ex operation

Requirements

DANGER
Loss of the certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Note that operation of a 3RW55 soft starter in the motor connection type "Standard" without
implementing one of the two following remedial measures for the following line voltages
results in loss of certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx (does not apply to
3RW55 Failsafe soft starters):
• Soft starter 200 - 480 V: for line voltage > 440 V (+10%)
• Soft starter 200 - 600 V: for line voltage > 500 V (+10%)
• Soft starter 200 - 690 V: for line voltage > 560 V (+10%)
Depending on the structure of the circuit, choose one of the following possibilities for ensuring
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx:
• Use an additional line contactor in the main circuit.
Connect the line contactor at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline) in Ex
operation (Page 305).
• For a motor feeder configuration with a circuit breaker, use an additional undervoltage trip
unit.
Connect the undervoltage trip unit at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Connecting (Page 71).

DANGER
Loss of the certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Note that operation of a 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with motor connection type
"Inside-delta" without implementing one of the two following remedial measures results in loss
of certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx:
Depending on the structure of the circuit, choose one of the following possibilities for ensuring
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx:
• Use an additional line contactor in the main circuit (in the supply cable or in the delta
connection).
Connect the line contactor at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Type of motor connection "inside delta" in Ex
operation (Page 307).
• For a motor feeder configuration with a circuit breaker, use an additional undervoltage trip
unit.
Connect the undervoltage trip unit at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Connecting (Page 71).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 207
Functions
8.14 ATEX / IECEx

• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0 and product version E02 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter
• Micro SD card (Page 243)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu "Parameters > Soft Starter > Ex operation"
If you are operating the motor in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations:
• If an Ex motor is protected, only parameter set 1 is active even if another parameter set is
selected. Parameter sets 2 and 3 are not available in this case.
Temperatures on the motor
• Make sure that the limit temperature of the winding insulation is not exceeded.
• Make sure that the maximum temperature of the motor is below the locally critical minimum
ignition temperature.
• Make sure that the explosion protection is ensured for operation of motors in the hazardous
area.

Operating principle
The "Ex application" function supports you with parameterization of the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter if you are operating a motor in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations. You
can choose which of the following motor protection functions is used to protect the motor:
• Complete motor protection
• Electronic motor overload protection
• Thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor
You must confirm each setting of Ex relevant parameters on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. This
prevents settings relevant to explosion protection from being corrupted during transmission.
This also ensures that the parameter changes were set on the correct 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter and the requirements of common standards and regulations are met.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters continue to work with the parameters that were last
active until you confirm the newly set parameters.

Note
Appearance of the text file and the Ex relevant parameters on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Note that the text file for logging the new Ex parameters in the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is only
shown in English.
For simpler comparison of the parameter settings logged in the text file with the Ex relevant
parameters to be enabled, the Ex-relevant parameters are shown in English.
As soon as the Ex relevant parameters are enabled, these parameters will appear in the set
language of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature again.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

208 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.14 ATEX / IECEx

Procedure
1. Make sure that a micro SD card is in the slot of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
2. Set the "Ex application" parameter and the corresponding parameters in the "Ex relevant
parameters" menu.
3. Exit the "Ex operation" menu with the ESC key.
A popup window appears in the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. The LEDs on the
3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters indicate that the device is waiting for confirmation
of the Ex-relevant parameters. You will find more information in chapter LED display
(Page 247).
4. Confirm the menu entry "Load Ex parameterization to micro SD card" with the OK key.
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature generates a text file in English ("txt" file format) in which the new
parameter settings are logged. This text file is stored on the micro SD card in the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature.
5. Check the parameter settings in the text file, e.g. on a PC.
– If the parameter settings are correct, confirm the menu item "Confirm Ex parameters" on
the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with the OK key. The parameters will be saved.
– If the parameter settings contain any errors, confirm the menu item "Discard Ex
parameters" on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with the OK key and set the parameters again.
6. Check confirmation of the Ex-relevant parameters on the device LEDs on the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. You will find more information in chapter LED display (Page 247).

Parameters

DANGER
Explosion danger in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations.
Will cause death or serious injury.
The components of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters are not suitable for installation
in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations
Only ever use the device in a control cabinet with at least degree of protection IP 4x.
Observe the safety instructions in chapter ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection
(Page 16).
If you have any questions, ask your ATEX/IECEx expert.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 209
Functions
8.14 ATEX / IECEx

Parameters Description
Ex application No (factory setting)
All ATEX/IECEx-specific function restrictions are not active. Ex parameter is not displayed.
Yes, with complete motor protection
• Both motor protection functions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters (electronic
motor overload protection and thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor) are
implemented in a safety-related manner.
Yes, with motor overload protection
• Only the motor protection function "Electronic motor overload protection" is implemented
in a safety-related manner.
• The motor protection function "Thermistor motor protection with Temperature sensor" is
not implemented in a safety-related manner.
Yes, with thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor
• Only the motor protection function "Thermistor motor protection with Temperature sen‐
sor" is implemented in a safety-related manner.
• The motor protection function "Electronic motor overload protection" is not implemented
in a safety-related manner.
Ex relevant parameters1) Rated operational current Ie
(Ex-relevant parameters1)) Set the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters to the rated operational current of the motor as
stated on the type plate or design test certificate of the motor.
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature shows the value to be enabled in parentheses.
Tripping class (or trip class)
Make sure that the motor and the cables are dimensioned for the selected trip class. The rated
data of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters refers to normal starting (CLASS 10E). For
heavy starting (> CLASS 10E), you may have to overdimension the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter because you can only set an operational current of the motor that is lower than the
operational current of the soft starter.
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature shows the value to be enabled in parentheses.
Recovery time
Set the recovery time.
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature shows the value to be enabled in parentheses.
Motor connection type
Set the motor connection type.
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature shows the motor connection type to be enabled in parentheses.
Ex application
1)
This parameter is displayed and can be set depending on the chosen Ex application.

Selection of the motor protection function

Selection of the motor protection function in question influences the parameterization. If the "Ex
application" is activated, impermissible settings of the ATEX/IECEx-relevant parameters are
deactivated and therefore prevented. The following parameters are ATEX/IECEx-relevant:

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

210 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.14 ATEX / IECEx

The following parameters must be set and confirmed by you:

Parameters Relevant for parameter "Ex application: Yes, with ..."

Complete motor protection Electronic motor overload Thermistor motor protec‐
protection tion with temperature sen‐
sor
Ex application selectable selectable selectable
Rated operational current Ie selectable selectable not selectable
Trip class selectable selectable not selectable
Recovery time selectable selectable not selectable
Motor connection type selectable selectable not selectable

Automatic setting by the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters:

Parameters Relevant for parameter "Ex application: Yes, with ..."

Complete motor protection Electronic motor overload Thermistor motor protec‐
protection tion with temperature sen‐
sor
General
Creep speed1) selectable2) not selectable selectable2)
Emergency start not selectable
Emergency run 1)
not selectable
Non-volatile tripping status Yes
(fixed value)
Parameter set 1 active
(fixed value)
Typical ambient temperature 60°C
(fixed value)
Bypass operating mode Internal bypass
(fixed value)
Electronic motor overload protection
Service factor 100% selectable1)
(fixed value)
Response to overload thermal Turn off without restart selectable1)
motor model (fixed value)
Thermistor motor protection with temperature sensor
Temperature sensor PTC type A selectable1) PTC type A
(fixed value) (fixed value)
Response to overload temper‐ Turn off without restart selectable1) Turn off without restart
ature sensor (fixed value) (fixed value)
1)
Parameter not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
2)
The parameter is not ATEX / IECEx-relevant in this combination and can be set in the relevant menu.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 211
Functions
8.15 Failsafe

Restriction of the possible parameters:

Parameters Relevant for parameter "Ex application: Yes, with ..."

Complete motor protection Electronic motor overload Thermistor motor protec‐
protection tion with temperature sen‐
sor
Starting mode
Motor heating1) selectable not selectable selectable
Stopping mode / Alternative stopping mode
DC braking1) selectable not selectable selectable
Dynamic DC braking 1)
selectable not selectable selectable
Reversing DC braking 1)
selectable not selectable selectable
1)
Parameter not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

8.15 Failsafe

8.15.1 Operating principle

Observe the safety instructions in chapter Failsafe (Page 20).

Behavior of the failsafe digital input F‑DI

The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is only switched on by a control command if an ON command is
present at the failsafe digital input F‑DI. As long as the ON state is present at the failsafe digital
input F‑DI, the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter first executes the parameterized starting function and
then moves on to the parameterized operating state. The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter remains in
the parameterized operating state until the control command is canceled. The 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter then performs the parameterized shutdown operation. Canceling the ON command
at the failsafe digital input F‑DI executes the safety function "Safe Torque Off" (STO).

Activation of the "Safe Torque Off" (STO) safety function

The safety function "Safe Torque Off" (STO) is activated by applying an OFF command at the
failsafe digital input F‑DI. If the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter receives the request for safe
shutdown "Safe Torque Off" (STO) via the failsafe digital input F‑DI (change from ON command
to OFF command), the current operating state is interrupted immediately and the stopping
mode "Coasting down" is used. Note that, in this case, the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter does not
consider any differently parameterized shutdown operation. The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
signals activation of the safety function "Safe Torque Off" (STO) by an error with the message text
"Safety-related shutoff". One exception is the SIL 3 (STO) application with coupling of the control
signal at the digital input DI to the enable signal at the failsafe digital input F‑DI. In this case, the
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter does not produce an error with message text because the coupling
causes the control command at control input DI to be set to OFF automatically.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

212 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.15 Failsafe

Timing chart

)',

',

① Safety-related shutoff
② Reset ON command required
③ Motor On / Off

Behavior of the failsafe signaling output F‑RQ

In the de-energized condition, the failsafe signaling output F‑RQ is opened. As soon as a main
supply voltage (operational voltage) is applied, the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter performs a device
test. After a successfully performed test of the switching elements, the failsafe signaling output
F‑RQ closes. If the motor is shut down and the parameterized stopping mode is ended, the
failsafe signaling output F‑RQ is still closed. The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter performs a device
test. After a successfully performed device test, another starting operation is possible.
The failsafe signaling output F‑RQ signals a device error of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. For
SIL 1 applications, this safety signaling output F‑RQ can be used to display the device state of the
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The safety signaling output F‑RQ must be evaluated by a safety relay
or safety control in SIL 3 applications to ensure shutdown of the motor in the error state.
The failsafe signaling output F‑RQ is only opened in the following cases:
• In the de-energized condition
• When a device error occurs (a group error does not influence the state of the failsafe signaling
output F‑RQ)
• During the firmware update of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• During the Self-test (user-test)

8.15.2 Resetting safety-related shutoff

After a safety-related shutoff, an automatic restart cannot be performed. Depending on the STO
application used, perform the following procedure to restart the motor.

Requirements
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• Observe the method of operation (Page 212) and the safety instructions in chapter Failsafe
(Page 20).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 213
Functions
8.16 Functions under "Additional parameters"

Procedure for SIL 1 (STO)

1. Reset the signal at the failsafe digital input F‑DI by changing from the OFF command to the
ON command.
Note that just resetting the EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton does not initiate a restart
(EN 60204‑1).
2. Acknowledge the error with the message text "Safety-related shutoff" by canceling the motor
ON command.
Note that the error with the message text "Safety-related shutoff" can only be acknowledged
with the stop key if a 3RW5 HMI High Feature is used.
The motor can be started again.
3. Set a start command at digital input DI again
The motor starts again.

Procedure for SIL 3 (STO)

1. Reset the signal at the failsafe digital input F‑DI by issuing an enable signal by pressing the
start key on the safety relay / safety control.
2. Acknowledge the error with the message text "Safety-related shutoff" by canceling the motor
ON command.
Note that the error with the message text "Safety-related shutoff" can only be acknowledged
with the stop key if a 3RW5 HMI High Feature is used.
The motor can be started again.
3. Set a start command at digital input DI again
The motor starts again.

Procedure for SIL 3 (STO) with coupling of the control signal at the digital input DI to the enable
signal at the failsafe digital input F‑DI.
Reset the signal at the failsafe digital input F‑DI by issuing an enable signal by pressing the start
key on the safety relay / safety control.
The motor starts again if a start command is still present at the digital input DI.

8.16 Functions under "Additional parameters"

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have additional functions and settable parameters
that are to be found under "Additional parameters" in the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

214 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.16 Functions under "Additional parameters"

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Soft Starter > Additional parameters"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Additional parameters"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Operation with CPU / Master
Response to CPU / Master Stop This parameter defines how the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters behave
on failure of the bus connection or CPU stop.
• Switch substitute value (factory setting)
The process image output is automatically changed by the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter to the values specified in the following "Substitute value"
parameter.
• Keep last value
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter does not modify the process image
output. The current control commands are retained.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 215
Functions
8.16 Functions under "Additional parameters"

Parameters Description
Substitute value1) On failure of the bus connection or CPU stop, the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters can be controlled by a substitute process image output.
• Motor CW
• Motor CCW
• Reset
• Emergency start
• Creep speed2)
• Output 1
• Output 2
• Parameter set 1
• Parameter set 2
• Parameter set 3
• Disable Quick-stop
• Output 32)
• Start pump cleaning (only adjustable via user program)
• Manual operation local - Input controlled (only adjustable via user program)
• Use alternative stopping mode
• Motor standstill
Parameters of CPU / master disabled This parameter defines how the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters process
the parameter values received from the controller. Setting the parameters only
affects the device parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.
Device parameters of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and of the 3RW5 communica‐
tion module are always overwritten regardless of how the parameters are set.
• Deactivate (factory setting)
The parameters set on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter are overwrit‐
ten on bus startup by the values stored in the configuration software of the
controller.
• Activate
The soft starter acknowledges to the controller the correct receipt of all the
parameter values sent to it by the controller via cyclic and acyclic communi‐
cation channels. The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter then rejects these
values. This prevents the parameters stored in the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters from being overwritten.
• Activate only for startup parameter
The parameterization block only affects the starting parameters upon start-
up. The setting is only possible together with a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS
communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

216 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.16 Functions under "Additional parameters"

Parameters Description
Response to overload switching element This parameter determines how the soft starter will behave when the intrinsic
device protection has tripped due to an overload.
• Turn off without restart (factory setting)
If a fault limit is exceeded, an error message and an internal trip command are
generated. If a lower fault limit is violated, the error message and the internal
trip command can be acknowledged with the "Reset" function after a cooling
time of 60 seconds.
• Turn off with restart
If a fault limit is exceeded, an error message and an internal trip command are
generated. If a lower fault limit is violated, the error message and internal trip
command are automatically acknowledged or canceled after a cooling time of
60 seconds.
Response to preset unequal actual config‐ A preset unequal actual configuration is present if there is a faulty configuration
uration for the following devices: or if there are differences between the real and configured slots of the module. The
• Soft starter parameter has no effect if a higher-level controller transfers a parameter assign‐
ment.
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• Ignore (factory setting)
• Communication module (if there is In the case of a preset unequal actual configuration the 3RW55 or 3RW55
one) Failsafe soft starter continues to operate (if necessary) with a restricted func‐
tion. If necessary, the technology function operates with substitute values to
be determined on a product-specific basis.
• Warn
In the case of a preset unequal actual configuration, no internal trip command
is generated. The warning "preset unequal actual configuration" appears.
• Turn off
In the case of a preset unequal actual configuration, an internal trip command
is generated. This internal trip command must be acknowledged with the
"Reset" function. If a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module is
available, then when a module is withdrawn or inserted a corresponding
withdrawal / insertion alarm is sent to the higher-level controller.
Bypass operating mode3) • Internal bypass (factory setting)
• External bypass2)
Note that in this operating mode, the motor current can no longer be meas‐
ured by the soft starter. Functions that are based on this current measured
value are deactivated (electronic motor overload protection, diagnostic mes‐
sages, ...)
For a sample circuit, see Chapter "External bypass (Page 334)".
Contact Technical Support (Support Request (Page 11)) for operating with an
external bypass.
• No bypass2)
Use the "No bypass" setting for applications with high switching frequency.
Please note that the "No bypass" setting is not suitable for applications in
continuous duty.
Contact Technical Support (Support Request (Page 11)) for operating without
a bypass.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 217
Functions
8.17 Setting the date and time

Parameters Description
Permissible main power rotation • Any (factory setting)
The main power rotation may be "clockwise" or "counter-clockwise".
• Clockwise
The main power rotation must be "CW".
• Counter-clockw.
The main power rotation must be "CCW".
Response to faulty main power In certain applications, operation of the motor is permitted only in a specified,
preset direction of rotation, to avoid damage. The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter detects the main power rotation via the measurement process. The re‐
quired main power rotation is determined when the application is first commis‐
sioned. Via the "Response to faulty main power" parameter, you can determine the
response of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter to main power rotation
deviations.
• Group error only at ON command (factory setting)
If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects a wrong main power ro‐
tation, a fault is generated.
• Warn
If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects a wrong main power di‐
rection, a warning is generated.
Typical ambient temperature The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is set to the predominant typical ambi‐
(can only be set via 3RW5 HMI High Fea‐ ent temperature actually present in the system. Ensure that the set typical ambi‐
ture) ent temperature is not exceeded.
• 40 °C
• 50 °C
• 60 °C (factory setting)
1)
In the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the parameter is only visible if "Switch substitute value" is selected in the parameter "Response
to CPU / Master Stop".
2)
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
3)
For 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0

8.17 Setting the date and time

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have a capacitor-buffered real-time clock with a
power reserve of about 3 days. You can set parameters for the date and time in the 3RW55 and
3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.
If the 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module is used, time synchronization
according to the NTP method is available. You will find further information in the manual of the
3RW5 PROFINET communication module.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

218 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.17 Setting the date and time

Setting options
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameter > Soft starter > Date and time"
Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Parameters" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Date and time"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP
– User program
You can find additional information on the parameters that can be set via the fieldbus in the
manual of the respective 3RW5 communication module.

Procedure
1. Select the menu item "Edit time".
2. Set the current time.
3. Select the menu item "Edit date".
4. Set the current date.

Parameters

Parameters Description
Edit time Sets the current time
Time format • 12 h (default)
• 24 h
Time offset Difference to UTC time zone: UTC +/- 12 h (in steps of at least
30 minutes)
Display time The time is shown in the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Fea‐
ture.
• Yes
• No (factory setting)
Edit date Sets the current date
Format of date • Day.Month.Year
• Day/Month/Year (factory setting)
• Year-Month-Day

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 219
Functions
8.18 Trace

Result
Date and time are stored in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. When replacing the
3RW5 HMI High Feature, the date and time are retained in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter.

8.18 Trace

Operating principle
With the trace function (oscilloscope function), the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters can
be used as a kind of multichannel digital oscilloscope. The trace function enables you to record
data, events, measured values, etc. in any operating mode of the motor. The trace data must be
read out with the aid of the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES software (TIA Portal) from the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The trace data is visualized in the form of an oscillogram in the SIRIUS
Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal). With a 3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0, you
can save trace data on a micro SD card (Page 243).

Requirements
• SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Standard / Professional
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Traces"

Types of trace
• Device trace
The recordings are saved on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and, when required,
can be read out and displayed as a graph using the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) software.
• Engineering trace
Recordings are read out cyclically using the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) software and
displayed as a graph.

Structure of trace data

• Trace configuration: The configuration defines which signals are to be recorded in the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and how (trigger, recording pulse).
• Diagram: The diagram consists of the display options for the recorded data and - if the
recording has already taken place - the recorded data itself.
A diagram that contains the recorded data can be stored permanently in the project as a
measurement.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

220 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.19 Test mode

Example of trace data

Additional information
Further information on the trace function can be found in the online help for the SIRIUS Soft
Starter ES (TIA Portal).

8.19 Test mode

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters must be in test mode for the test mode
functions "Test with small load" (Page 222) and "Simulation" (Page 224) In test mode, the "RN"
LED flashes green on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters must be in Normal operation mode to enable normal operation.
The parameters "Test mode" and "Normal operation" are not available in the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 221
Functions
8.19 Test mode

Setting options

WARNING
Automatic starting in test operation (test with a small load and simulation)
Can cause death or serious injury.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters immediately continue to operate with the values
set by the control once test operation has been activated. Outputs are activated when the ON
condition is met.
Take appropriate measures to prevent unintentional starting and to ensure a defined start of
the system.

• 3RW5 HMI High Feature (from firmware version V2.0)

Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
Menu: "Control > Test mode"
Note
Activating test mode
If you activate or deactivate "Test with small load" or the "Simulation" on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature, you will automatically also switch to Test mode or Normal operation. For activation
and deactivation on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature must have
master control.

• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Functions > Test mode"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS
communication module):
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

8.19.1 Test with small load

Operating principle
The test mode function "Test with small load" is helpful during commissioning and when
troubleshooting, as the correct function of the application can be tested before installation in a
control cabinet or before the use of a motor provided for the application. The "Test with small
load" provides a way of checking the wiring of the control and main circuit with the aid of a small
motor (test motor).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

222 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.19 Test mode

In the test mode function "Test with small load", the motor operating states and all functions and
messages can be executed and displayed by the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter as in
normal operation.
If, during an active "Test with small load", the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter detects that
the main power current is missing, a fault is generated with a shutdown command and the
message text "Line voltage for test required". After connecting the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter to the main supply this error message can be acknowledged with Reset.
The error monitoring functions that are to be attributed to a missing or inadequate main supply
are not active. The test mode function "Test with small load" remains active until the test mode
function is deactivated.
The motor and intrinsic device protection functions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters remain active according to their parameterization and are not influenced by the test
mode function "Test with small load".

Requirements
• The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is connected to the main circuit.
• The test mode functions, e.g. "Simulation" or "Self-test (user-test)" are deactivated.
• The test motor is connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Permissible power range of the test motor:
– < 10% of the rated power of the motor provided for the application
– ≥ 1 kW
• The test motor is switched off prior to activation of the test mode function "Test with small
load".
• The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must be in Test mode (Page 221). In test mode, the
"RN" LED flashes green on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
Note
Activating test mode
If you activate or deactivate "Test with small load" on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, you will
automatically also switch to Test mode or Normal operation. For activation and deactivation
on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature must have master control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 223
Functions
8.19 Test mode

Setting options

WARNING
Automatic starting in test operation (test with a small load)
Can cause death or serious injury.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters immediately continue to operate with the values
set by the control once test operation has been activated. Outputs are activated when the ON
condition is met.
Take appropriate measures to prevent unintentional starting and to ensure a defined start of
the system.

• 3RW5 HMI High Feature (from firmware version V2.0)

Menu: "Control > Test mode"
Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Functions > Test mode"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS
communication module):
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

Parameters

Parameters Description
Activate test with small load The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter switches to the test mode function "Test with
small load".
Deactivate test with small load The test mode function "Test with small load" is terminated. The 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter exits the test mode and switches back to the parametrized operating
mode.

8.19.2 Simulation

Operating principle
The test mode function "Simulation" is useful for commissioning and troubleshooting because
any situations can be tested without great effort, e.g. wiring modifications, connection of
external devices or interventions in the PLC.
With the test mode function "Simulation", the 3RW55 soft starter virtually simulates the motor
operating states (starting, running, stopping) without main current. The 3RW55 soft starter

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

224 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.19 Test mode

tests the wiring, the behavior when the monitoring function responds and the soft starter
parameterization of the plant for correct functioning. In simulation of the motor operating
states, all functions and messages of the 3RW55 soft starter are executed and displayed as in
normal operation. The error monitoring functions that are to be attributed to a missing main
supply are not active.
If, during an active "Simulation", the 3RW55 soft starter detects the presence of main current, a
fault is generated with a shutdown command and the message text "Line voltage for test not
permissible". This safety measure prevents a connected motor from being switched on
accidentally. After disconnection of the 3RW55 soft starter from the main supply, this error
message can be acknowledged with Reset. The "Simulation" remains active until the test mode
function is deactivated.
The motor and intrinsic device protection functions of the 3RW55 soft starter remain active
according to their parameterization and are not influenced by the test mode function
"Simulation".

Validity
This function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0
• The test mode functions, e.g. "Test with small load" or "Self-test (user-test)" are deactivated.
• The 3RW55 soft starter is disconnected from the main circuit.
• The motor is switched off.
• The 3RW55 soft starter must be in Test mode (Page 221). In test mode, the "RN" LED flashes
green on the 3RW55 soft starter.
Note
Activating test mode
If you activate or deactivate the "Simulation" on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, you will
automatically also switch to Test mode or Normal operation. For activation and deactivation
on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature must have master control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 225
Functions
8.19 Test mode

Setting options

WARNING
Automatic starting in test operation (simulation)
Can cause death or serious injury.
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters immediately continue to operate with the values
set by the control once test operation has been activated. Outputs are activated when the ON
condition is met.
Take appropriate measures to prevent unintentional starting and to ensure a defined start of
the system.

The execution of the test mode function "Simulation" is possible as follows:

• 3RW5 HMI High Feature (from firmware version V2.0)
Menu "Control > Test mode"
Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Functions > Test mode"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS
communication module):
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

Parameters

Parameters Description
Activate simulation On activation of the test mode function "Simulation", simulation of
the motor operating states is started automatically.
Deactivate simulation On deactivation of the test mode function "Simulation", simulation of
the motor operating states is ended automatically.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

226 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.20 Monitoring

8.20 Monitoring

8.20.1 Monitoring the measured values of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature

Operating principle
The measured values are provided by the respective device functions. All measured values are
stored in the measured value memory, which is volatile. These values can be read out and
evaluated by the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. You can specify up to 5 measured values, which are
shown on the operation display (Page 121).

Display on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Monitoring > Measured values"

Further display options of the measured values

• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Measured values"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 227
Functions
8.20 Monitoring

Measured values

Measured value Description

Phase currents (%) • I L1 The phase currents are shown as a percentage relative to the rated op‐
erational current Ie. You can monitor each phase (L1/L2/L3) individually,
• I L2
or the average of all 3 phases.
• I L3
These measured values can be presented graphically as a bar or line
• Average chart on the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.1)
• Show bar chart1) You will find further information in chapters Design and operator con‐
trols of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 98) and Graphical display of
measured values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 229).
Phase currents (rms) • I L1 The phase currents are displayed in amperes. You can monitor each
phase (L1/L2/L3) individually, the average of all 3 phases, or the maxi‐
• I L2
mum value of each phase.
• I L3
These measured values can be presented graphically as a bar or line
• Average chart on the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.1)
• I L1/L2/L3 max You will find further information in chapters Design and operator con‐
• Show bar chart1) trols of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 98) and Graphical display of
measured values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 229).
Asymmetry The maximum deviation as a percentage of one phase current relative to
the average value of all 3 phase currents.
Motor voltage • U L1-L2 The motor voltage is shown in Volts. You can monitor the motor voltage
of each phase.
• U L2-L3
These measured values can be presented graphically as a line chart on
• U L3-L1
the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.1)
You will find further information in chapters Design and operator con‐
trols of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 98) and Graphical display of
measured values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 229).
Power Active power Indicates the current active power in kW.
This measured value can be presented graphically as a line chart on the
display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.1)
You will find further information in chapters Design and operator con‐
trols of the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 98) and Graphical display of
measured values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 229).
Power factor L1...3 Indicates the current power factor.
Line frequency Indicates the current line frequency in Hz.
Output frequency This value is displayed only if the starting and stopping output frequen‐
cies differ from the line frequency.
Motor temperature rise Current value of motor temperature rise in %. This measured value is
calculated internally by the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and
indicates the relative temperature rise of the motor.
Remaining time for motor overload protection The remaining time for motor overload protection provides a dynamic
prediction of the time in seconds remaining until the tripping of the
motor overload protection, depending on the momentary motor cur‐
rent.
Remaining motor cooling time The remaining recovery time in seconds after protective tripping of the
motor until the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is ready to operate
again.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

228 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.20 Monitoring

Measured value Description

Remaining switching element cooling time The remaining cooling time of the switching element depends on the
thermal capacity of the power unit and the ambient conditions (tem‐
perature, air circulation, installation location, etc.).
The remaining switching element cooling time is stated in seconds.
Switching element heating The currently calculated switching element heating is continuously
compared with the previously saved switching element heating and
indicated in %.
Remaining switching frequency monit. time The remaining time in seconds following a switching operation until the
motor can be switched on again.
You will find more information in chapter Switching frequency monitor‐
ing (Page 178).
1)
For 3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0

8.20.2 Graphical display of measured values on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters support graphical display of measured values.
These measured values can be presented as bar or line charts on the display of the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature.

Procedure for displaying bar charts

The following measured values can be shown in the bar chart:
• Phase current L1 (%) and (rms)
• Phase current L2 (%) and (rms)
• Phase current L3 (%) and (rms)
• Phase current average (%) and (rms)
1. Select the menu item "Monitoring > Measured values > Phase currents (%) / Phase currents
(rms) > Show bar chart".
Depending on the menu item selected, the current values of the 3 phase currents (%) or
phase currents (rms) and the average value are displayed graphically in a bar chart.
2. Use the left and right navigations keys of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature to switch the view
between Phase currents (%) and Phase currents (rms).
3. Press the ESC key to exit the bar chart view.
The example chart shows the current 3 phase currents (L1/L2/L3) and the associated average
value as a percentage. The scaling of the x-axis is 200%.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 229
Functions
8.20 Monitoring

/ 

/ 

/ 

/š 

Procedure for displaying line charts

The following measured values can be shown in the line chart:
• Phase current L1 (%) and (rms)
• Phase current L2 (%) and (rms)
• Phase current L3 (%) and (rms)
• Phase current average (%) and (rms)
• Line-to-line voltages U L1-L2 [V]
• Line-to-line voltages U L2-L3 [V]
• Line-to-line voltages U L3-L1 [V]
• Active power

Operation display
1. Select the measured value to be displayed in the operation display and press the right
navigation key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
The selected measured value is shown graphically in a line chart.
2. Use the left and right navigation keys of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature to switch the view
between measured values (only possible within current or voltage measured values).
3. Press the ESC key to exit the line chart view.

"Monitoring" menu
1. Select the menu item "Monitoring > Measured values".
2. Select the measured value to be displayed and press the right navigation key of the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature.
The selected measured value is shown graphically in a line chart.
3. Use the left and right navigation keys of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature to switch the view
between measured values (only possible within current or voltage measured values).
4. Press the ESC key to exit the line chart view.
The sample chart shows the actual phase current I L1 as a percentage. The scaling of the y-axis
is 200%.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

230 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.20 Monitoring

,/>@



 W

If the measured value exceeds the limit of the scaling (200% in the example), the line extends
parallel with the x-axis and is displayed red in that area.

8.20.3 Monitoring the process image of the 3RW55 soft starter with the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature

Operating principle
The process image input (PII) contains current information about the soft starter and process
state. The process image output (PIQ) contains the current control commands to the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The control command states of the control source, which has control
priority according to the operating mode controller, are entered in the data memory of the
process image outputs. Note the overview of the process images in chapter Process data and
process images (Page 196).

Display on the HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Monitoring > Process image"

Display of the process images on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

In the process image input (PII) and process image output (PIQ), you can see which bits of the
process image are active or inactive:

Check box Status Bit

inactive 0

active 1

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 231
Functions
8.21 Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Further display options

• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

Additional information
You will find further information on transferring the process images via a fieldbus in the device
manual for the respective 3RW5 communication module.

8.21 Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Operating principle
You can control the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with
the aid of various control commands. You can facilitate quick access by assigning various control
commands to the Start key and Function selection key F1‑F9. You will find further information
in chapters Configuring the start key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 119) and Configuring
the Function selection key F1-F9 of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 117).

Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Control"

Further control options

• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Task Card" > Tab "Online Tools" > "SIRIUS Control Panel"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

232 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.21 Control via 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Control commands

Control command Description

Select parameter set Parameter set 1 Select one of the 3 parameter sets.
(factory setting) One parameter set is deactivated when another parameter set is
Parameter set 2 activated. One parameter set must be active at all times.
Parameter set 3
Local/Remote Changes the location of control.
Control motor Motor CW Motor rotates clockwise
Motor CCW Motor rotates counter-clockwise.
The control command can also be executed in reversing mode (with
ext. contactor).
Stop motor The activation command to the motor is canceled
Creep speed1) Make sure that the control command "Motor CW" or "Motor CCW" is
applied with the control command "Creep speed".
• Activate
• Deactivate (factory setting)
You will find more information in chapter Creep speed (Page 172).
Alternative stopping mode Activate alternative stopping in order to set up an additional stop in
parameter set 1.
• Activate
• Deactivate
You will find more information in chapter Alternative stopping
(Page 163).
Pump cleaning start This control command is only visible if the pump cleaning function
has been parameterized.
You will find more information in chapter Pump cleaning function
(Page 182).
Reset Execute a RESET.
You will find more information in chapter Reset (Page 173).
Disable Quick-stop Motor does not stop despite pending ON command of Quick-stop.
You will find more information in chapter Quick-stop (Page 174).
Emergency mode Emergency start The system can continue to be operated in the case of system faults
with the "emergency start" function.
• Enable
• Disable
You will find more information in chapter Emergency start
(Page 189).
Emergency run1), 2) With the "Emergency run" function, the 3RW55 soft starter can
continue to run with restricted functionality after failure of a power
semiconductor.
• Enable
• Disable
You will find more information in chapter Emergency run
(Page 191).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 233
Functions
8.22 Overview

Control command Description

Test mode Test with small load The test mode function "Test with small load" provides a way of
checking the wiring of the control and main circuit with the aid of
a small motor (test motor).
• Activate
• Deactivate
You will find more information in chapter Test with small load
(Page 222).
Simulation1), 3) With the test mode function "Simulation", the 3RW55 soft starter
virtually simulates the motor operating states (starting, running,
stopping) without main current.
• Activate
• Deactivate
You will find more information in chapter Simulation (Page 224).
PIQ-DQ Bit 1.0 (output 1) Activates or deactivates the control command concerned.
PIQ-DQ Bit 1.1 (output 2) Requirement: The output action "Control source PIQ-DQ x.y Out‐
PIQ-DQ Bit 2.01) (output 3) put n" is assigned to a digital output.
• 3RW55 soft starter: You can assign the control commands "Out‐
put 1", "Output 2" and "Output 3" to the digital outputs 1, 2
and 4 of the 3RW55 soft starter in any order via the digital out‐
put actions.
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter: You can assign the control com‐
mands "Output 1" and "Output 2" to the digital outputs 1 and 2
of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in any order via the digital
output actions.
You will find more information in chapter Digital outputs
(Page 198).
1)
Function is not available for the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
2)
For 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1
3)
For 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0

8.22 Overview

Operating principle
The "Overview" menu displays the connected components and their device-related information
(I&M data).

Note
Device-related information
Note that it is only possible to edit the displayed device name of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

234 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.22 Overview

Display on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Overview"

Additional display options of the device-related information (I&M data)

• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Online & Diagnostics" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter / 3RW5 communication module
used / HMI > Diagnosis > General"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module:
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET
or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)
– User program

Note
I&M data
I&M0 data is assigned for all of the devices (3RW5 soft starter, 3RW5 HMI High Feature, and
3RW5 communication module) and can be read out. Only the proxy for the "Station" (slot 0) has
adjustable and readable I&M1, I&M2 and I&M3 data. The "Station" comprises the following
devices:
• 3RW5 communication module (slot 1)
• 3RW5 soft starter (slot 2)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature (slot 3)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 235
Functions
8.22 Overview

Parameter

Parameter Description
Soft starter Module • Article number1)
• Hardware1)
• Firmware1)
Module information • Tag function2)
• Tag location2)
• Installation date3)
• Additional information4)
Assign a device name to the 3RW5 soft starter via SIRIUS
Soft Starter ES or with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. The
device name appears in the top line of the display of the
3RW5 HMI High Feature. If you do not assign any name to
the 3RW5 soft starter, the 3RW5 soft starter retains its
short designation. If the set device name is too long, only
the first part of the device name is displayed.
Manufacturer information • Manufacturer1)
• Serial number1)
HMI Module • Article number1)
• Hardware1)
• Firmware1)
Manufacturer information • Manufacturer1)
• Serial number1)
Communication mod‐ Module • Article number1)
ule • Hardware1)
(if existing)
• Firmware1)
Manufacturer information • Manufacturer1)
• Serial number1)
1)
Part of the I&M0 data
2)
Part of the I&M1 data
3)
Part of the I&M2 data
4)
Part of the I&M3 data

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

236 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

8.23.1 General advice on using PINs

The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have 2 functions with a PIN each for protecting
against unauthorized access:
• Local access protection (Page 237)
• User account administration (Page 240) (user login and log off (Page 242))
You have the option of combining both versions.

Pins for local access protection and user account administration

Note that each function uses a separate PIN:
• HMI PIN for local access protection
• HMI User PIN for user accounts

Combination of local access protection and user account administration

When using local access protection and user account administration, note the sequence of PIN
entry on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. Enter the HMI PIN first and then the HMI User PIN in order
to unlock locked menus.
If the HMI PIN and the HMI User PIN are identical, there is no need to enter the HMI User PIN on
the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.

8.23.2 Local access protection (PIN)

Operating principle
With the PIN, you can protect the 3RW5 HMI High Feature from unauthorized access. The menus
of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature can still be viewed with local access protection activated. It is not
possible to issue a control command or to set a parameter. If you issue a control command or
change a parameter when local access protection is enabled, you will automatically receive an
entry prompt for the current PIN beforehand.
The PIN remains even after the power supply has been interrupted. You can reset the local access
protection to the factory setting with the master RESET key on the rear of the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature (Page 280). Protect the master RESET key from unauthorized access.

Setting on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Security > Local access protection"

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 237
Functions
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

Parameter

Parameter Description
Local access protection Define PIN 1)
PIN is set up and active (Page 238). In the factory setting, no
PIN is set up and the local access protection is not active.
Change PIN2) Existing PIN is changed (Page 239).
Delete PIN 2)
PIN is deactivated and deleted (Page 239).
Auto log off time 2)
If you do not regularly press a key on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature, the current session will be terminated after the auto
logoff time has elapsed.
• Factory setting: 0 min = deactivated
• Setting range: 0 ... 60 min
Log on 3)
Remove the local access protection by logging on with your 4-
digit PIN.
Log off4) Log out of your current session. The local access protection is
activated again. Alternatively, the session will be terminated
after the auto logoff time.
1)
Menu item is displayed if no PIN has been defined.
2)
Menu item is displayed if a PIN has been defined.
3)
Menu item is displayed after logging off with an active PIN.
4)
Menu item is displayed after logging on with an active PIN.

8.23.2.1 Define PIN

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Security > Local access protection"
• No PIN is defined (factory setting).

Procedure
1. Select the menu item "Define PIN".
2. Using the navigation keys, set a 4-digit PIN and confirm your entry with the OK key.
3. The user information "HMI PIN defined" appears on the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
Confirm by pressing the OK key.
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature then returns to the "Local access protection" menu.

Result
You have defined the PIN and the set PIN is active.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

238 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

8.23.2.2 Change PIN

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Security > Local access protection"
• A PIN is defined.

Procedure
1. Select the menu item "Change PIN".
2. Log on using the current 4-digit PIN and confirm your entry with the OK key.
If the entry is correct, the user information "Log on was successful" appears on the display of
the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. Confirm by pressing the OK key.
3. Using the navigation keys, set a 4-digit PIN and confirm your entry with the OK key.
The user information "HMI PIN changed" appears on the display of the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature. Confirm by pressing the OK key. The 3RW5 HMI High Feature then returns to the
"Local access protection" menu.
4. Select the menu item "Log on".
5. Log on using the current 4-digit PIN and confirm your entry with the OK key.
If the entry is correct, the user information "Log on was successful" appears on the display of
the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. Confirm by pressing the OK key.

Result
You have changed the PIN and the changed PIN is active.

8.23.2.3 Delete PIN

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Security > Local access protection"
• A PIN is defined.

Procedure
1. Select the menu item "Delete PIN".
2. Log on using the current 4-digit PIN and confirm your entry with the OK key.
If the entry is correct, the user information "HMI PIN deleted" appears on the display of the
3RW5 HMI High Feature. Confirm by pressing the OK key. The 3RW5 HMI High Feature then
returns to the "Local access protection" menu.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 239
Functions
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

Resetting the PIN via the factory setting

You can reset the local access protection to the factory setting with the master RESET key on the
rear of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 280).

Result
You have deactivated and deleted the current PIN.

8.23.3 Setting up user account management

Operating principle
In combination with the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES software (TIA Portal), the 3RW55 and 3RW55
Failsafe soft starters support the function of user administration.
Before you are able to log in to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the user administrator must first set
up a user account with HMI User PIN using the SIRIUS Soft Starter ES software (TIA Portal). The
user account is transferred to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter using the local interface,
3RW5 communication module or a micro SD card (only with the function "Device change"
(Page 281))

Note
Loss of control priority when user administration is activated
Note that activation of the user administration disconnects the control source from the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and therefore results in loss of master control.
Log onto the 3RW5 HMI High Feature via the "User login" with the HMI User PIN to regain master
control. You will find further information on the control priority in chapter Operating modes and
master control function (Page 32).

Log onto 3RW5 HMI High Feature via the "User login" with your HMI User PIN. The user
administration compares the user account data stored in the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter with the HMI User PIN entered by the user. If the data matches, you are granted access
with the access rights stored in the user account data until the user monitoring time has elapsed
and you are logged off or you log off by means of the "User log off" function. The access rights
are contained in the user account data indirectly as user roles.
More information about setting up a user account can be found in the online help for SIRIUS Soft
Starter ES (TIA Portal). You can find further information on logging on and off with the
HMI User PIN in chapter User login and logout (Page 242).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

240 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

Requirements
• User account has been set up in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
• User account has been transferred with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via one of the
following paths to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter:
– Local interface
– Fieldbus via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module
– Micro SD card (only with the function "Device change" (Page 281))

User roles and user rights

• User administrator: Creating, editing or deleting all user accounts.
• Diagnostics personnel: Access rights in order to display diagnostic data (without login).
• Operating personnel: Functional operation of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
• Maintenance personnel: Maintenance access (control, parameterize, test) to the device.

Diagnosis Control Parameterizing FW update Administration

of user accounts
User administrator - - - - x
Diagnostics personnel X - - - -
Operating personnel X X - - -
Maintenance person‐ X X X X -
nel

When user administration is active, without the HMI user PIN you only have access to the menus
"Monitoring", "Diagnosis", "Overview" and "Security".

Parameters of the user accounts

You can log onto the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with the user name and password (via
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)) or with the 4-digit HMI User PIN (via 3RW5 HMI High Feature).

User name
• 1 ... 32 characters
• Numerals, uppercase and lowercase letters, and all special characters are possible

User password
• 4 ... 32 characters
• Numerals, uppercase and lowercase letters, and special characters ?!+%$

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 241
Functions
8.23 Local access protection and user account administration

Note
A secure password is only valid for a single user account, is more than 8 characters long, and
contains uppercase and lowercase letters, special characters and numerals. Do not use any
common numeric sequences from the computer keyboard or words from the dictionary. Change
your password at regular intervals.

HMI User PIN

• 4-digit HMI User PIN
• Digits 0 ... 9
• A login with PIN is only possible via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Auto log off time

You will be automatically logged off on expiry of the programmable auto log off time (Page 237).

8.23.4 User login and logout

Operating principle
You can protect the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters against unauthorized access by
issuing PIN-protected user accounts.
You will find more information in chapter Setting up user account management (Page 240).

Requirements
• User account has been set up in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
• User account has been transferred with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via one of the
following paths to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter:
– Local interface
– Fieldbus via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module
– Micro SD card (only with the function "Device change" (Page 281))
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Security"

Procedure for User login

1. Select the "User login" menu in order to log in with your user account.
2. Enter the 4-digit HMI User PIN.
After correctly entering the HMI User PIN you are logged in with your user account.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

242 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.24 Micro SD card

Procedure for User log off

1. Select the "User log off" menu in order to log out with your user account.
Access protection is activated again.

Result
With the HMI User PIN you can protect the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter from
unauthorized access. The "Monitoring", "Diagnosis", and "Overview" menus can still be viewed.
The HMI User PIN is retained even after the power supply has been interrupted.

8.24 Micro SD card

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Micro SD card"
The "Micro SD Card" menu appears after you have inserted a micro SD card into the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature.
• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• Inserted micro SD card, e.g. micro SDHC Class 10
– File format: FAT32
– Capacity: max. 32 GB

Operating principle
Together with a micro SD card, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature can perform firmware updates,
exchange configuration files and service data, and store logbooks.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 243
Functions
8.24 Micro SD card

Parameters

Action Description
Load parameter settings to soft starter The parameterization of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
and of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature are transferred from the micro SD
card to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The following data
is transferred:
• Device parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
• Device parameters of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• User administration / passwords
Applications: Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft start‐
er in series / identically (Page 123)
Save parameter settings to micro SD card The parameterization of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, of
the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and of the communication are transfer‐
red to the micro SD card. The data is saved in an automatically gen‐
erated folder (e.g. "1P3RW5 xxx-xxxxx"). The following data is trans‐
ferred:
• I&M 1 data (Page 234)
• I&M 3 data (Page 234)
• Device parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
• Device parameters of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• User administration / passwords
• Communication parameters
Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).
Applications:
Parameterizing the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in series /
identically (Page 123)
"Device change" function (Page 281)
Device change When a device is replaced, the parameterization of the 3RW55 or
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and of the
communication can be transferred to the new device. The following
data is transferred:
• I&M 1 data (Page 234)
• I&M 3 data (Page 234)
• Device parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
• Device parameters of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• User administration / passwords
• Communication parameters
Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).
Application: "Device change" function (Page 281)
Save trace data to micro SD card1) Via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, trace data (Page 220) of the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter can be saved to the micro SD card and
read out via SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
Save logbooks to micro SD card The logbooks are backed up on the micro SD card. You will find more
information in chapter Logbooks (Page 265).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

244 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Functions
8.25 Reloading a language for the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

Action Description
Save service data to micro SD card2), 3) The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters record service data dur‐
ing starting and stopping. If problems occur in the system in con‐
junction with the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, you can save
the service data on the micro SD card and have it evaluated by the
service personnel.
You will find more information in chapter Save service data to micro
SD card (Page 266).
FW update • Soft starter The firmware update is carried out if a valid firmware file is stored on
the micro SD card. The 3RW5 HMI High Feature automatically detects
• Communication module
which firmware file the micro SD card contains
• HMI
You will find further information on the firmware update in
chapter Performing firmware update with micro SD card (3RW5 HMI
High Feature) (Page 277).
Download language1) You can load additional languages onto the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
via the micro SD card.
You will find more information in chapter Reloading a language for
the High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 245).
Memory space • Complete memory The memory capacity is displayed.
• Free memory
• Used memory
1)
For 3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0
2)
For 3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V2.0
3)
For 3RW55 soft starters from firmware version V2.0, for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters from firmware version V1.0

8.25 Reloading a language for the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature from firmware version V3.0
Menu: "Micro SD card"
• Micro SD card (Page 243) with valid language file in the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
The first two digits of the version of the language file must match the first two digits of the
firmware version (Vx.y) of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
You will find the current language files on the Internet (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109772736).
• The valid language file is located in the root directory (topmost level).
• Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 245
Functions
8.25 Reloading a language for the High Feature 3RW5 HMI

Operating principle
The 3RW5 HMI High Feature supports the subsequent loading of an additional language. The
additional language is transferred from the micro SD card to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and can
then be selected. Loading an additional language overwrites or deletes an already loaded
additional language. If the additional language is active when the language update is
performed, it will be retained until another language is selected. It is only possible to return to
this additional language if this language is updated. The following languages contained in the
factory setting of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature are not provided for downloading and are always
part of the firmware update for the 3RW5 HMI High Feature:
• English (factory setting)
• German
• French
• Spanish
• Italian
• Portuguese
• Chinese

Procedure
1. Choose the menu item "Download language" and confirm with OK.
2. Select the required language file on the micro SD card and confirm with OK.

Result
You have loaded an additional language onto the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and can set it with
the selection "Additional language" (Page 121).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

246 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Messages and diagnostics 9
9.1 Diagnostics options
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters provide you with the following diagnostic options:
• LEDs on the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) (accessories) via local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High
Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter / HMI > Diagnosis"

Further diagnostics options

You will find further diagnostics options via the fieldbus in the manual for the respective
3RW5 communication module.

9.2 LED display

9.2.1 Overview of the device LEDs on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

  

① RUN (green) Indicates whether the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is ready for
operation.
② ERROR (red) Indicates whether there is an error.
③ MAINTAINANCE (yel‐ Indicates whether a message is present.
low)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 247
Messages and diagnostics
9.2 LED display

9.2.2 Status and error displays

LED "RN" - RUN

Status Meaning
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is ready for operation.

Lights up
green
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is not ready for operation, e.g. due to:
• System startup
Flashes green • 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is reset to factory setting.
• Self-test (user-test) active
• Firmware update
• Test mode active

LED "ER" - ERROR

Status Meaning
No errors are present.

Off
There is at least one error.

Flashes red

LED "MT" - MAINTENANCE / WARNING

Status Meaning
No warning is active.

Off
At least one warning exists. The cause has not been eliminated.

Lights up yel‐
low
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is in energy-saving mode1). You can find further information about
the energy-saving mode in the manual for the 3RW5 PROFINET communication module.
Flashes yellow
1)
3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.1 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter from firmware version V1.0

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

248 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.2 LED display

LED combinations

Status Meaning
RN ER MT
(RUN) (ERROR) (MAINT)
• The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter waits for confirmation of the ATEX /
IECEx-relevant parameters via the OK key.
Off
Flashes Flashes yel‐
green low
• The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is not ready for operation.
• Device error detected.
Flashes Flashes red Flashes yel‐
green low

9.2.3 Overview of LEDs on High Feature 3RW5 HMI

Device LEDs (RN, ER, MT)

The display of the device LEDs of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 98) shows the status
summary for the following devices:
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• 3RW5 communication module (if there is one)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Please note that the display of the device LEDs of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature does not have to
correlate with the display of the device LEDs of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Status LED
The display on the status LED of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 98) indicates the state of the
3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and the operating state of the motor.

Status Status of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Fail‐ Motor operating state

LED safe soft starter
Operation The ramp-up time comes to an end and the motor is
running.
Lights up
green
Starting or stopping time active Motor is ramping up or ramping down.

Flashes
green

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 249
Messages and diagnostics
9.3 Warnings and remedial measures of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Additional information
You will find further information on messages of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters in
chapter Status and error displays (Page 248).
You will find further information on the messages of the 3RW5 communication module in the
manual for the 3RW5 communication module in question.

9.3 Warnings and remedial measures of the 3RW55 and 3RW55

Failsafe soft starters

Display of the warnings

The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters signal warnings by means of the following displays:
• "MT" LED (yellow)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Display of the warnings on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Detailed information about warnings and remedial actions appears in plain text on the display
of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.

Warnings and remedial measures

Warning Cause Remedy

Generator operation The motor is coasting down. The motor Parameterize the ramp-down mode to
connection cables may be energized. minimize or avoid the generator opera‐
tion.
Connection abort in manual mode Connection to operator device (e.g. • Check the communication between
3RW5 HMI) is interrupted. the 3RW5 HMI and the device.
• Check the connection between PC
and the local device interface.
Temperature sensor overload The temperature of the motor is too high. • Check the motor and the application
that is driven by the motor.
• After triggering, the motor can only
be switched on again if the tempera‐
ture has reached the release position
of the temperature sensor.
• The behavior of the soft starter de‐
pends on the "Response to overload
temperature sensor" parameter that
has been set.
Temperature sensor wire break A wire break has occurred in the sensor Check the sensor line and the tempera‐
line of the temperature sensor. ture sensor.
Temperature sensor short-circuit A short-circuit has occurred in the sensor
line of the temperature sensor.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

250 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.3 Warnings and remedial measures of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Warning Cause Remedy

Preset unequal actual configuration Real and configured slot of module is dif‐ Ensure consistency between plugged
ferent. and configured module position. Possi‐
bly the referenced module has a wiring
error.
Switching element too hot for Start Contact block (switch contact, power • Check the ambient conditions asso‐
semiconductors) too hot. ciated with cooling. You may want to
consider lowering the operating
characteristics.
• Check the number of switching op‐
erations.
New EX parameter values detected Parameters for the EX motor protection Confirm the correctness of the parame‐
have been received. ters directly on the protection device, or
for the protection device.
Remaining time for tripping warning lim‐ The time to overload trip of the thermal • Let the motor cool down.
it undershot motor model is shorter than the config‐ • For heavy starting and settings for
ured time for the tripping reserve.
tripping CLASS 20, deactivate this
monitoring.
Motor heating warning limit exceeded • The motor feeder is overloaded. • Check the motor and the applica‐
• The motor temperature has excee‐ tions driven by the motor.
ded a limit. • You can switch on the motor again
after the cooling-down period has
expired or after deleting the thermal
motor model.
Current limit - maintenance demanded The current has exceeded a limit. Check the application driven by the mo‐
exceeded tor.
Current limit - maintenance demanded The current has undershot a limit.
undershot
Asymmetry limit warning exceeded A limit for asymmetry has been excee‐ Check the motor feeder and the motor.
ded. Asymmetry can cause an overload.
Possible causes:
• Phase failure
• Fault in the motor windings
Ground fault limit warning exceeded The ground-fault monitoring has respon‐ Check the connecting cable of the motor
ded. An impermissibly high residual cur‐ for damage.
rent is flowing.
Switching frequency time not kept The maximum number of starting oper‐ The next starting operation should take
ations in the monitoring period has been place only after the interlock time has
exceeded. expired.
2-phase control with defective thyristor For 3-phase operation, only 2 phases are Check the power semiconductors for L1,
active1) activated because a power semiconduc‐ L2 and L3 and replace any that are de‐
tor is defective. fective.
Main power rotation faulty The direction of rotation field is not cor‐ -
rect.
Check fan • Internal fan is dirty (not rotating free‐ • Check the function of the fan.
ly). • Clean the fan.
• Connecting cable has fallen off or is • Check the wiring.
defective.
• Replace the fan.
• Internal fan faulty

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 251
Messages and diagnostics
9.4 Errors and remedial actions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Warning Cause Remedy

Active power limit - maintenance de‐ The active power of the motor has ex‐ Check the application driven by the mo‐
manded exceeded ceeded a limit. tor.
Active power limit - maintenance de‐ The active power of the motor has fallen
manded undershot below a limit.
Starting time limit - maintenance de‐ The configured maximum starting time Prolong the "max. starting time" param‐
manded exceeded is shorter than the required motor start‐ eter, increase the current limiting value
ing time. or check the load coupled with the motor
for a mechanical defect.
Starting time limit - maintenance de‐ The configured minimum starting time is Shorten the "min. starting time" param‐
manded undershot longer than the required motor starting eter, lower the current limiting value or
time. check the load coupled with the motor
for a mechanical defect.
1)
Not for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

9.4 Errors and remedial actions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starters

Display of the faults

The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters signal errors by means of the following displays:
• "ER" LED (red)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Display of faults on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Detailed information about errors and remedial actions appears in plain text on the display of the
3RW5 HMI High Feature.

Errors and remedial actions

Error Cause Remedy

Switching element overload Contact block (switch contact, power • Check the ambient conditions associated
semiconductors) too hot. with cooling. You may want to consider
lowering the operating characteristics.
• Check the number of switching operations.
• Acknowledgment after cooling down. The
acknowledgment depends on the "Re‐
sponse to overload switching element" pa‐
rameter that has been set.
Switching element defective • Switching element defective Check the switching elements L1, L2, and L3
and replace any that are defective.
• The fault is also generated if the
defective switching element (by‐
pass or power semiconductor)
cannot be accurately identified.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

252 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.4 Errors and remedial actions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Error Cause Remedy

No main power • The mains switch or the power Check the cables and the cable connections
supply is not plugged in correctly. and replace defective components, if necessa‐
ry.
• There is no power.
Temperature sensor overload The temperature of the motor is too • Check the motor and the application that is
high. driven by the motor.
• After triggering, the motor can only be
switched on again if the temperature has
reached the release position of the temper‐
ature sensor. The acknowledgment de‐
pends on the "Response to overload tem‐
perature sensor" parameter that has been
set.
Temperature sensor wire break A wire has broken in the sensor cable Check the sensor line and the temperature sen‐
of the temperature sensor. sor.
Temperature sensor short-circuit A short-circuit has occurred in the
sensor line of the temperature sensor.
Thermal motor model overload • The motor feeder is overloaded. • Check the motor and the applications driv‐
Motor overload protection - shutoff • The motor temperature has ex‐ en by the motor.
ceeded a limit. • You can switch on the motor again after the
cooling-down period has expired or after
deleting the thermal motor model. The ac‐
knowledgment depends on the set "Re‐
sponse to overload thermal motor model".
Safety-related shutoff1) The module has detected a problem Check the channel and eliminate the cause.
on the channel and has therefore exe‐
cuted a safety-related shutoff. The
possible reason is a discrepancy error.
Asymmetry limit error exceeded A limit for asymmetry has been ex‐ Check the motor feeder and the motor.
ceeded. Asymmetry can cause an
overload. Possible causes:
• Phase failure
• Fault in the motor windings
Asymmetry shutoff Additional tripping in the case of
asymmetry
Current limit error exceeded The current has exceeded a limit. Check the application driven by the motor.
Current limit error undershot The current has undershot a limit.
Current limit error shutoff Additional tripping in the event of a
current limit error overshoot or un‐
dershoot.
Ground fault limit error exceeded The ground-fault monitoring has re‐ Check the connecting cable of the motor for
sponded. An impermissibly high re‐ damage.
sidual current is flowing.
Electronics supply voltage too low The supply voltage is below the per‐ Check the power supply (load rating, voltage
mitted value. range).
Bus error Fault in the fieldbus communication. • Check the bus connection.
You will find further information in • Check the bus parameters.
the manual for the 3RW5 communi‐
cation module in question.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 253
Messages and diagnostics
9.4 Errors and remedial actions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Error Cause Remedy

Error process image The process image output (PIQ) con‐ Check and correct the process image output
tains invalid control bit combinations (PIQ).
(e.g. control bits for clockwise and
counter-clockwise rotation are set at
the same time).
Invalid parameter value The module is not or is incorrectly • Correct and execute parameterization.
parameterized or parameterization • Switch the operating mode and repeat pa‐
changes are denied in current oper‐
rameterization.
ating mode.
No external start parameters received Necessary startup data for the device Check parameterization or startup data re‐
are missing. cords.
Self-test error Unrecoverable error detected after Switch off the power supply (control supply
internal diagnostics (self-test, contac‐ voltage) for at least 5 seconds and switch it on
tor contacts, switching element, again. If the fault is still present proceed as fol‐
etc.). lows:
• Please contact Technical Support (Support
Request (Page 11)).
• Replace the device.
Preset unequal actual configuration Real and configured slot of module is • Ensure consistency between plugged and
different. configured module. Possibly the referenced
module has a wiring error.
• After the cause is eliminated, the error self-
acknowledges.
Motor connection wrong The motor connection type was not Ensure correct connection.
recognized or is different from config‐
uration.
Missing load No current flow is detected after the Acknowledgment once the cause has been rec‐
motor feeder is switched on. Possible tified.
causes:
• Main circuit interrupted (fuse, cir‐
cuit breaker)
• Motor contactor or contactor con‐
trol is defective
• No load
Loss of phase L1 The main power monitoring detects a Acknowledgment once the cause has been rec‐
Loss of phase L2 phase failure. tified.
Loss of phase L3
Overvoltage The supply voltage is above the toler‐ Change the power supply.
ance limit.
Bypass defective • Bypass defective Switch off the power supply (control supply
voltage) for at least 5 seconds and switch it on
• The error can also be generated
again. If the fault is still present proceed as fol‐
by successive, brief interruptions
lows:
of the control supply voltage.
• Please contact Technical Support (Support
Request (Page 11)).
• Check bypasses for L1, L2 and L3 and re‐
place any that are defective.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

254 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.4 Errors and remedial actions of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters

Error Cause Remedy

Bypass protective shutoff In bypass operation the current was • Check motor.
too high. Fault resetting is only possi‐ • Check dimensioning of the soft starter.
ble after cooling down.
• Acknowledgment after cooling down. The
acknowledgment depends on the "Re‐
sponse to overload switching element" pa‐
rameter that has been set.
Switching element L1 failed Switching element defective Switch off the power supply (control supply
Switching element L2 failed voltage) for at least 5 seconds and switch it on
again. If the fault is still present proceed as fol‐
Switching element L3 failed lows:
• Please contact Technical Support (Support
Request (Page 11)).
• Check the switching elements for L1, L2,
and L3 and replace any that are defective.
Phase control failure 1. Error appears without motor 1. Check and correct the wiring.
start: 2. Adjust parameters or extend pause time.
– Motor incorrectly connected
– Inside-delta circuit incorrectly
realized
– Ground fault
2. Error appears while motor is start‐
ing:
– Kick start voltage too high
– Breakaway pulse incorrectly
set
Current measuring range exceeded • With sensors: The measured val‐ Check the interaction between the module and
ue has exceeded the range limits. the sensor or actuator.
• With actuators: The output value
has exceeded an upper limit.
Device error Unrecoverable error detected after Switch off the power supply (control supply
internal diagnostics (self-test, contac‐ voltage) for at least 5 seconds and switch it on
tor contacts, switching element, again. If the device error is still present proceed
etc.). as follows:
• Please contact Technical Support (Support
Request (Page 11)).
• Replace the device.
FW update faulty The firmware is incomplete and / or • Run a complete firmware update.
the firmware expansions are incom‐ • Check any occurring error messages.
plete or incompatible.
• Check to see whether or not the firmware
update was aborted.
Switching frequency time not kept The maximum number of starting op‐ The next starting operation should take place
erations in the monitoring period has only after the interlock time has expired.
been exceeded.
Main power rotation faulty The direction of rotation field is not -
correct.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 255
Messages and diagnostics
9.5 Faults and remedial actions of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Error Cause Remedy

Active power limit error exceeded The active power of the motor has Check the application driven by the motor.
exceeded a limit.
Active power limit error undershot The active power of the motor has
fallen below a limit.
Active power limit error shutoff Additional tripping in the event of an
active power limit error overshoot or
undershoot.
Main power for test not allowed2) Current is flowing in the motor feeder -
even though it is in test mode or in
the test position. Possible causes:
• The main circuit is not interrupted
in test mode.
Line voltage for test required • The mains switch or the power Check the cables and the cable connections
supply is not plugged in correctly. and replace defective components, if necessa‐
ry.
• No current
Operating temperature too high The temperature in the components Check the ambient temperature or the control
has exceeded the maximum limit. cabinet cooling.
Actuator shutoff The module has disconnected the ac‐ -
tuator. An additional diagnostic mes‐
sage will be displayed to provide you
with more detailed information
about the cause.
1)
For 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters only.
2)
Not for 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.

9.5 Faults and remedial actions of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Display of the faults on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Detailed information about faults and remedial actions appears in plain text on the display.

Faults and remedial actions

Error Cause Remedy

Error HMI Unrecoverable error detected af‐ Replace the device.
ter internal diagnostics (self-test,
etc.).
FW update not successful The firmware is incomplete • Run a complete firmware update.
and/or the firmware expansions • Check any error messages that occur.
are incomplete or incompatible.
• Check to see whether or not the firmware update
was aborted.
Error during self-test Unrecoverable error detected af‐ Replace the device.
ter internal diagnostics (self-test,
etc.).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

256 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Error Cause Remedy

Write Error File cannot be written to the mi‐ • Check whether the micro SD card is inserted.
cro SD card. • Check whether the micro SD card is write-protec‐
ted.
FWUpdateInvalidSignature The firmware is incomplete • Run a complete firmware update.
and/or the firmware expansions • Check any error messages that occur.
are incomplete or incompatible.
• Check to see whether or not the firmware update
was aborted.
No device answer The connection to the connected Check the connection between the HMI and the de‐
soft starter has been interrupted. vice.
Loading language unsuccessful1) Subsequently loading the lan‐ • Ensure the languages are loaded completely.
Invalid signature 'Load additional guage is incomplete and/or the • Check any error messages that occur.
language'1) loaded language is incomplete or
incompatible. • Check to see whether or not loading the language
has been interrupted.
1)
3RW5 HMI High Feature firmware version V3.0 or higher

9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft

starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
With the diagnosis, you can display different statuses (Diagnosis state, Device state), Statistic
data and Maximum pointer of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. There is also the self-
test (user-test) (Page 264) and logbooks (Page 265).

Requirements

Note
Diagnostics on the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
Make sure that for diagnostics the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is always directly connected to the
main supply voltage (operational voltage).
Additional contact elements, such as a redundant contactor, must only be connected in series
behind the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

• You are in the "Diagnosis > Soft Starter" menu.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 257
Messages and diagnostics
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Parameters

Diagnostic value Description

Diagnosis state Shows all active warnings and faults.
You will find further information on diagnostic messages in chap‐
ters Warnings and remedial measures of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Fail‐
safe soft starters (Page 250) and Errors and remedial actions of the
3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters (Page 252).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

258 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Diagnostic value Description

Device state Active parameter set Display of active parameter set
Type of connection If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is supplied with main
supply voltage (operational voltage) and a motor is connected, the
motor connection type is automatically detected.
• Type of motor connection unknown
• Type of motor connection standard
• Type of motor connection inside delta
Rotation direction • Unknown (direction of line phase rotation of the main supply
voltage (operational voltage) at terminals L1 / L2 / L3 not detec‐
ted)
• CW
• CCW
Device I/Os Display of active inputs and outputs
Energy saving mode Display of the energy saving mode
• Energy saving mode active
Ready (automatic)
Motor CW
Motor CCW
Emergency start active
Group error
Group warning
Starting mode active
Stopping mode active
Electrical braking active1)
Creep speed active1)
Idle time active
Cooling time active
Current limiting active
Input control
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Enable Quick-stop
Maximum pointer reset
CPU/Master STOP
Automatic mode
Operating mode manual - bus
Operating mode manual - local
Parameter assignment active
Parameters cannot be changed in ON state
Parameters disable CPU/master active
Self-test active

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 259
Messages and diagnostics
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Diagnostic value Description

Factory settings restored
Faulty parameter number
Parameter set 1 active
Parameter set 2 active
Parameter set 3 active
Parameter set change not possible
Motor heating active1)
DC braking active1)
Dynamic DC braking active1)
Type of motor connection standard
Type of motor connection inside delta
Type of motor connection unknown
Main power rotation right
Main power rotation left
Output 1 active
Output 2 active
Output 3 active
Output 4 active
Output 1 - Time active
Output 2 - Time active
Output 4 - Time active1)
Ready to start for motor ON
Thermal motor model deactivated
Switching element cooling time active
Automatic mode
Operating mode manual - bus
Manual operation bus - PC controlled
Operating mode manual - local
Manual operation local - Input controlled
Manual operation local - HMI controlled
Manual operation local - PC controlled
Manual operation bus - web server controlled
Automatic operation - Input controlled
FW update rejected
FW update active
FW update successful
Operation / bypass active
Start pause pending
Energy saving mode active
Normal operation active
Test mode active
Start condition not fulfilled2)
Start condition fulfilled2)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

260 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Diagnostic value Description

Reset ON command required2)
Ex application active
Ex release denied - wrong CRC
Pump cleaning active
Analog output underflow
Analog output overflow
Missing initialization after maintenance
Switching frequency time running
Switching frequency lock active
Emergency start enabled
Emergency run enabled1)
Emergency run active1)
Alternative stopping mode active
Reversing DC braking active1)
Simulation active
Test with small load active
Automatic parameterization active
Logbook application - error deleted
Logbook application - warnings deleted
Logbook application - events deleted
Statistic data
3)
Active energy import (total)
Operating hours - motor
Reset operating hours motor
Number of motor overload trips
Number of starts motor CW
Number of starts motor CCW
Number of starts output1
Number of starts output2
Number of starts output3
Number of starts output4
Number of braking stops
Phase current max (%)
Phase current max (rms)
Last tripping current IA (%)
Last tripping current IA (rms)
Number of switching element overload trips
Number of bypass overload trips
Operating hours – device
Last real starting time

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 261
Messages and diagnostics
9.6 Performing diagnostics on the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters using the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Diagnostic value Description

Maximum pointer4) Phase currents (%) Phase current I L1 min (%)
Phase current I L2 min (%)
Phase current I L3 min (%)
Phase current I L1 max (%)
Phase current I L2 max (%)
Phase current I L3 max (%)
Phase currents (rms) Phase current I L1 min (rms)
Phase current I L2 min (rms)
Phase current I L3 min (rms)
Phase current I L1 max (rms)
Phase current I L2 max (rms)
Phase current I L3 max (rms)
Line-to-line voltages (rms) Line voltage U L1-L2 min
Line voltage U L2-L3 min
Line voltage U L3-L1 min
Line voltage U L1-L2 max
Line voltage U L2-L3 max
Line voltage U L3-L1 max
Maximum trigger current (%)
Maximum trigger current (A)
Number of motor overload trips
Number of starts with ext. bypass1), 5)
Minimum line frequency
Maximum line frequency
Maximum switching element heating
Reset maximum pointer Reset the maximum pointer with this menu item.
Self-test (user-test) Performing the self-test (user-test)
You will find more information in chapter Self-test (user-test)
(Page 264).
Logbooks The logbook is a history memory in which events, warnings and
faults are shown with a real-time stamp and stored in a list.
The logbook can be stored on a micro SD card (Page 243).
You will find more information in chapter Logbooks (Page 265).
1)
Not available with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
2)
Only available with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.
3)
The statistic data is based primarily on operating states relating to operating hours and operating frequency of the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in the past.
4)
Maximum pointers are based on measured values and represent the highest or smallest measured value that occurred in the
past.
5)
3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

262 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.8 Performing diagnostics of the 3RW5 communication module with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

9.7 Execute HMI diagnostics with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
With the diagnosis, you can display the diagnosis state of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and check
correct functioning of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with various tests.

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Diagnosis > HMI"

Note
Self-tests
To be able to start the self-tests with a 3RW5 HMI High Feature with firmware version V3.1, the
motor connected to the 3RW5 soft starter must be switched off.
3RW5 HMI High Feature with firmware version V3.1 or earlier: During the self-test, you cannot
switch off the motor on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. If you are controlling the motor via the
3RW5 HMI High Feature, switch off the motor before a self-test.

Parameter

Diagnostic value Comment

Diagnosis state Shows all active diagnostic messages (faults, warn‐
ings, device state).
Self-test Test LEDs The device LEDs of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature are
tested one after the other. The display shows which
device LED is currently being controlled. Navigate
through the test operation with the OK key.
Test buttons The 3RW5 HMI High Feature keys are tested one
after the other. The display shows which keys must
be actuated in sequence in order to perform the
test.
Test display The 3RW5 HMI High Feature runs a color program
on the display. Navigate through the test operation
with the OK key.

9.8 Performing diagnostics of the 3RW5 communication module with

the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
With the diagnosis, you can display the diagnosis state of the 3RW5 communication module.

Requirements
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Diagnosis > Communication module"
• 3RW5 communication module (accessory)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 263
Messages and diagnostics
9.9 Self-test (user-test)

Parameter

Diagnostic value Comment

Diagnosis state Shows all active prewarnings and faults. You can acknowledge
faults here. A 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication mod‐
ule also shows the device state.

Additional information
You will find further information on the diagnostics of the 3RW5 communication module in the
Equipment Manual for the respective 3RW5 communication module.

9.9 Self-test (user-test)

With the self-test (user-test), you can test correct functioning of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters (LEDs, current measurement, electronic motor overload protection, F‑RQ failsafe
signaling output).

Requirements
• The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is in the error-free condition.
• Perform the test with the motor switched off.

Activation on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

• Menu: "Diagnosis > Soft Starter > Self-test"
• The 3RW5 HMI High Feature (LOCAL) has master control.
• Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Operating principle
Start the self-test (user-test) via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. The self-test (user-test) is
performed as follows:
• LED test
All LEDs are controlled (3RW5 soft starter and 3RW5 HMI High Feature).
• Current measurement test
The current detection is tested in all 3 phases.
On the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, the average phase current (%) relative to the
rated operational current Ie is displayed. The thermistor motor protection is tested for short
circuits and overload.
• Test of the electronic motor overload protection
The entire control circuit is tested, including the switching elements and the error signaling
output.
• Test of the F‑RQ failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42) on the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter (function test)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

264 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.10 Logbooks

Result
If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter performs the self-test (user-test) as specified, the
3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter responds with an overload trip after approx. 5 seconds. The
error message for "Motor overload protection - shutoff" appears on the display of the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature. You can reset this error message immediately without observing the cooling time
with the "Reset" function.
If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter does not pass the self-test (user-test), the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature signals a device error.

Self-test of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

You will find more information on the self-test of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature in chapter Execute
HMI diagnostics with the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 263).

9.10 Logbooks

Operating principle
The logbook lists events, warnings, and faults in chronological order. Each of these events is
given a real-time stamp. The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters have the following
logbooks:
• Application logbook
• Device logbook
• Service logbook
• Security logbook
The logbook is designed as a circular buffer.

Display and editing options

• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Diagnosis > Soft Starter > Logbook"
• With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft Starter >
"Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Logbook"
• With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS
communication module):
– With SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) Premium / Professional
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via the local interface on the
3RW5 HMI High Feature
– Configuration software of the control system (e.g. STEP 7 with corresponding HSP)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 265
Messages and diagnostics
9.11 Save service data to micro SD card

Application logbook
The application logbook contains all messages relating to functions and parameters. The
logbook application can be deleted.

Device logbook
The following messages are recorded in the device logbook:
• Errors
• Warnings
• Event
The device logbook is available in every module (3RW55 soft starter, 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter,
3RW5 HMI High Feature, 3RW5 communication module) and cannot be deleted.

Service logbook
Messages about device errors, deactivation of protective functions, etc., are recorded in the
service logbook. The service logbook cannot be deleted.

Security logbook
The security logbook records all messages of the security functions. The security logbook cannot
be deleted.

Saving logbooks
• You can save the logbooks on a micro SD card (Page 243) if a micro SD card is inserted in the
HMI HF:
– Menu: "Micro SD card > Save logbooks to micro SD card"
– Click "OK". A *.csv file is stored on the micro SD card, which you can read out with
Microsoft Excel, for example.

9.11 Save service data to micro SD card

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter from firmware version V2.0 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter from firmware
version V1.0
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature firmware from version V2.0
Menu: "Micro SD card"
The "micro SD Card" menu appears after you have inserted a micro SD card into the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature.
• Inserted micro SD card (Page 243)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

266 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Messages and diagnostics
9.11 Save service data to micro SD card

• Access protection to the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.
• Motor switched off

Operating principle
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters record service data during starting and stopping.
If problems occur in the system in conjunction with the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter,
you can save the service data on the micro SD card. The service data can help Technical Support
to handle the case in the event of a Support Request (Page 11). The service data contain the
following data, for example:
• Parameters
• Logbooks
• Statistic data
• Maximum pointer
• I&M data

Procedure
Save the service data on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature onto the micro SD card.
Menu: "Micro SD card > Save service data to micro SD card"
Saving the service data can take a little time (> 1 minute). At the top level of the micro SD card,
a folder is created with the serial number of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in which
the service data is stored. Example of a created folder name: "1P3RW5 xxx-xxxxx+SLO..."

Note
Save service data to micro SD card
While the service data are being saved to the micro SD card, the color of the micro SD card icon
changes from blue to red on the display 3RW5 HMI High Feature. If the service data have been
saved completely, the color of the icon changes back to blue.

Icon of the micro SD card on the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature:

Result
You have stored the service data on the micro SD card.
These service data can help Technical Support to handle the case in the event of a Support
Request (Page 11). If necessary, read the micro SD card in at a PC and send the folder of service
data as a ZIP file.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 267
Messages and diagnostics
9.11 Save service data to micro SD card

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

268 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Maintenance and service 10
10.1 Maintenance and repairs

WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Can cause death or serious injury.
The present device/part conducts hazardous voltages.
Touching live components will result in death or severe injury.
Installation, commissioning, and maintenance only by qualified specialist personnel.

Repair of the devices is only permissible by qualified personnel. Please contact the authorized
Siemens service partner for this.

Note
Loss of ATEX / IECEx approval
The repair of soft starters with approval according to IEC 61508 / EN ISO 13849 is only
permissible in the manufacturer's plant.
Any repair to the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters that is not performed in the
manufacturer's plant will result in loss of ATEX/IECEx approval.

Note
Loss of failsafe approval
The repair of soft starters with approval according to IEC 61508 / EN ISO 13849 is only
permissible in the manufacturer's plant.
Any repair to the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters that is not performed in the manufacturer's plant
will result in loss of Failsafe approval.

10.2 Replacing the fan

Requirements
• Replacement fan, incl. connector (connector is not relevant for size 5)
• Optional: The fan cover is disassembled.
• Flat-head screwdriver (size 1)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 269
Maintenance and service
10.2 Replacing the fan

• Diagonal cutter (sizes 1 ... 4)

• Pliers (size 1 ... 4)

Procedure for size 1 (3RW551.-.....)

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Disconnect the system and the device from the power supply before starting work.

On the underside of the soft starter, insert a flat-head screwdriver into the opening on the right
above the fan. Press the flat-head screwdriver down ① until the tab opens upward. Remove the
defective fan ② and cut the cables at the fan.

Connect the cables using the connector supplied as a separate item ① and ②. Carefully ensure
the correct polarity (red and black).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

270 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.2 Replacing the fan

Fit the replacement fan ③ until it engages:

• The adhesive label faces inward.
• The cable guide is top left. It ensures that the cable is correctly routed.
• Ensure that the cable is not crushed.

Procedure for sizes 2 and 3 (3RW552.-..... and 3RW553.-.....)

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Disconnect the system and the device from the power supply before starting work.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 271
Maintenance and service
10.2 Replacing the fan

On the underside of the soft starter, push the lugs to the left and right of the fan downward ①.
Remove the defective fan ② and cut the cables at the fan.

Connect the cables using the connector supplied as a separate item ① and ②. Carefully ensure
the correct polarity (red and black).

Fit the replacement fan ③ until it engages:

• The adhesive label faces inward.
• The cable guide is top left.
• Ensure that the cable is not crushed.

Procedure for size 4 (3RW554.-.....)

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Disconnect the system and the device from the power supply before starting work.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

272 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.2 Replacing the fan




On the underside of the soft starter, push the lug at the bottom in the center of the fan
downward ①.
Remove the defective fan ② and cut the cables at the fan.

Connect the cables using the connector supplied as a separate item ① and ②. Carefully ensure
the correct polarity (red and black).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 273
Maintenance and service
10.2 Replacing the fan

Fit the replacement fan ③ until it engages:

• The adhesive label faces inward.
• The cable guide is top left.
• Ensure that the cable is not crushed.

Procedure for size 5 (3RW555.-.....)

DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Disconnect the system and the device from the power supply before starting work.




On the underside of the soft starter, push the lug at the bottom in the center of the fan
downward ①.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

274 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.3 Firmware update

Remove the defective fan ② and disconnect the cable.

Connect the cable and fit the replacement fan ③ until it engages:
• The adhesive label faces inward.
• The cable guide is top right.
• Ensure that the cable is not crushed.

10.3 Firmware update

During operation, it may be necessary to update the firmware (e.g. to extend the available
functions). You update the firmware of the respective device with the help of device-specific
firmware files. The retentive data is retained after the firmware has been updated.
Firmware updates and a history of the versions with the innovations are provided to you on the
Internet. Depending on what firmware updates are available, you can update the devices
individually or together.
You can perform a firmware update for the following devices:
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature (not possible via fieldbus)
• 3RW5 communication modules

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 275
Maintenance and service
10.3 Firmware update

Requirements
• Valid firmware update
You will find the latest firmware files on the 3RW5 topic page (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109747404).
• For operation of an application in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations:

DANGER
Loss of the certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx.
Will cause death or serious injury.
A certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx is only provided for 3RW55
soft starters from firmware version V2.0 (does not apply to 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters).
Note that it is not permissible to downgrade to a previous firmware version because
otherwise certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx cannot be
guaranteed.

Procedure
1. Make sure that the motor is switched off and you do not start the motor during the firmware
update.
A control command for starting the motor is not supported during the firmware update.
To ensure the quickest and most fault-free firmware update, it is recommended that you
disconnect the main supply voltage (operational voltage) of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starters and put the CPU / PLC into the STOP state.
2. Perform the update of the device firmware.
The following procedures are possible:
– With a micro SD card via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 277)
– Via the local interface of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES
(TIA Portal)
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft
Starter > "Online & Diagnostics" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter /
3RW5 communication module used / HMI > Functions > Firmware Update"
– With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)
Premium / Professional or the configuration software of the controller (e.g. STEP 7 with
corresponding HSP) (via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module only)

Note
Firmware update of the 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module
The firmware update of the 3RW5 PROFINET High Feature communication module via SIRIUS
Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) at the local interface or using a micro SD card via the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature can take a very long time in comparison with other options (up to about
60 minutes).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

276 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.4 Performing firmware update with micro SD card (3RW5 HMI High Feature)

Result
You have performed a firmware update for the selected device. The selected device
automatically restarts.

Note
Firmware update of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature:
Please note that the display switches off for about 30 seconds when the firmware is activated.

10.4 Performing firmware update with micro SD card (3RW5 HMI High
Feature)

Requirements
• Micro SD card with valid firmware file (*.upd)
• The valid firmware file is located in the root directory (topmost level)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Micro SD card > FW update"
• Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been reset.

Procedure

Note
Access to micro SD card.
Please note that the micro SD card is inserted in the 3RW5 HMI High Feature during updating of
the firmware.
Premature removal of the micro SD card from the 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not permissible and
will terminate updating of the firmware. Data could also be lost.

1. Select the folder of the respective device.

2. Select the firmware file of the device and confirm with the OK key.
You can see the firmware update is being performed from the progress bar on the display.
Following successful updating of the firmware, the respective device then restarts
automatically.
Note
Firmware update of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature:
Please note that the display switches off for about 30 seconds when the firmware is activated.

3. Check the new firmware version in the "Overview" menu.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 277
Maintenance and service
10.5 Restoring factory setting

Result
You have performed a firmware update for the selected device using the micro SD card.

10.5 Restoring factory setting

Effects of the factory setting

The following devices can be reset to the factory setting:
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
– The parameters of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter are reset to the factory
setting.
– User accounts are deleted.
– Ex-relevant parameters are reset.
You will find further information on Ex operation in chapter ATEX / IECEx (Page 206).
• 3RW5 communication module
– The parameters of the 3RW5 communication module are reset.
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
– The parameters of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature and the PIN for access protection are reset
to the factory setting.
• All devices
– The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, the 3RW5 communication module, and the
3RW5 HMI High Feature are reset to the factory settings, as described above.

Requirements
The control priority lies with the source of the command to restore the factory setting.

DANGER
Restoring the factory setting with active Ex operation.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Restoring the factory setting with active Ex operation (Page 207) is not permissible for all
procedures.
To restore the factory setting with active Ex operation, choose the procedure using the master
RESET key on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 280).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

278 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.5 Restoring factory setting

Procedure
1. Make sure that the motor is switched off and you do not start the motor while restoring the
factory settings.
To ensure the quickest and most fault-free restoration of the factory setting, it is
recommended that you disconnect the main supply voltage (operational voltage) at the
3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.
2. Restore the factory settings.
The following procedures are possible:
– Via the 3RW5 HMI High Feature:
Restoring the factory settings via High Feature 3RW5 HMI (Page 279)
Restoring the factory settings with the Master RESET button via 3RW5 HMI High Feature
(Page 280)
– Via the local interface on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES
(TIA Portal)
Brief overview: Window "Project Navigation" with current project under created Soft
Starter > "Commissioning" > Window "Work area" > "Soft Starter > Functions >
Commands > Factory settings"
– With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)
Premium / Professional (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module)
Brief overview: See SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) via local interface on the 3RW5 HMI
High Feature
– With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module with the command "Factory settings"
in data set 93 (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module):
– With a fieldbus via a 3RW5 communication module with the configuration software of the
control (only via a 3RW5 PROFINET or EtherNet/IP communication module). Only the
communication parameters are reset here.

Result
The factory setting of the selected device or all devices is restored.

10.5.1 Restoring the factory settings via High Feature 3RW5 HMI

Requirements
• Make sure that the motor is switched off and you do not start the motor while restoring the
factory settings. To ensure the quickest and most fault-free restoration of the factory setting,
it is recommended that you disconnect the main supply voltage (operational voltage) at the
3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature
Menu: "Parameters > Factory settings"
• Access protection to 3RW5 HMI High Feature is not active or has been removed.
• The 3RW5 HMI High Feature (LOCAL) has master control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 279
Maintenance and service
10.5 Restoring factory setting

DANGER
Restoring the factory setting with active Ex operation.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Restoring the factory setting with active Ex operation (Page 207) is not permissible for this
procedure.
To restore the factory setting with active Ex operation, choose the procedure using the master
RESET key on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 280).

Procedure
1. Select the desired menu item.
– Soft starter
– Communication module
– HMI High Feature
– All devices
2. Confirm the menu item by pressing the OK key.

Result
The factory setting of the selected device or all devices is restored.
Note the effects of the factory settings (Page 278).

10.5.2 Restoring the factory settings with the Master RESET button via 3RW5 HMI
High Feature

Requirements
• Make sure that the motor is switched off and you do not start the motor while restoring the
factory settings. To ensure the quickest and most fault-free restoration of the factory setting,
it is recommended that you disconnect the main supply voltage (operational voltage) at the
3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters.
• Free access to the Master RESET key of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
Removing the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 60)
• 3RW5 HMI High Feature is connected to the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter via the HMI
connecting cable.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

280 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.6 "Device change" function

DANGER
Resetting of ex-relevant parameters to the factory setting.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Ex-relevant parameters are deleted on restoration of the factory setting.
Restoration of the factory setting with active Ex operation (Page 207) is only permissible via the
master RESET button on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature. After restoration of the factory setting,
you have to parameterize the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter again for use in Class I and
Class II Hazardous Locations. You will find further information on parameterization of the
3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters for use in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations in
chapter ATEX / IECEx (Page 206).

Procedure
1. Press the Master RESET key on the rear of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
The menu for restoring the factory setting appears on the display.
2. Select the desired menu item.
– Soft starter
– Communication module
– HMI High Feature
– All devices
3. Confirm the menu item by pressing the OK key.

Result
The factory setting of the selected device or all devices is restored.
Note the effects of the factory settings (Page 278).

10.6 "Device change" function

WARNING
Hazardous voltage.
Can cause death or serious injury.
The present device/part conducts hazardous voltages.
Touching live components will result in death or severe injury.
Installation, commissioning, and maintenance only by qualified specialist personnel.

The device replacement is only permissible by qualified personnel.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 281
Maintenance and service
10.6 "Device change" function

Operating principle
If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, the 3RW5 HMI High Feature or the
3RW5 communication module (accessory) has to be replaced because of a fault, you can transfer
data to your new device (identical type) using the "Device change" function or SIRIUS Soft Starter
ES (TIA Portal). To be able to transfer data, you must first save it.
The following data is transferred with the "Device change" function:
• I&M 1 data
• I&M 3 data
• Device parameters of the 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters
• Device parameters of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature
• User administration / passwords
• Communication parameters
Note the information in chapter Firmware update (Page 22).

Transmission options
• Device change with micro SD card on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature (Page 282)
• Device change with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) (Page 283)

10.6.1 Device change with micro SD card on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature

Requirements
• Micro SD card with the saved data (Page 243)
– The folder (e.g. "1P3RW5 xxx-xxxxx+SLO...") is located in the root directory (top level).
– The article number in the name of the folder must match the article number of the 3RW55
or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. The serial number in the name of the folder ("SLO...") does
not need to match.
– Menu: "Micro SD card > Save parameter settings to micro SD card"
The data is saved in an automatically generated folder (e.g. "1P3RW5 xxx-xxxxx+SLO...").

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

282 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Maintenance and service
10.6 "Device change" function

Procedure
1. Plug the micro SD card into the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
2. Transfer the data to the devices (3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 3RW5 HMI High
Feature, 3RW5 communication module).
Menu: "Micro SD card > Device change"
Note
Device change
The current data of all devices (3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 3RW5 HMI High
Feature, 3RW5 communication module) is overwritten by the data on the micro SD card.

3. Check the transferred data.

Result
You have transferred your saved data to your devices (3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter,
3RW5 HMI High Feature, 3RW5 communication module) with the "Device change" function.

10.6.2 Device change with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal)

Requirements
• Accessories (optional), e.g. 3RW5 PROFINET or PROFIBUS communication module
• Connection of the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter to SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must not be connected online to SIRIUS Soft Starter
ES (TIA Portal).
• Project in SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal) with saved data (identical type)
Button: "Upload from device" on the toolbar.
In the "Project Navigation" window, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must be
selected in the current project so that the button can be operated.

Procedure
1. Transfer the data to the devices (3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 3RW5 HMI High
Feature, 3RW5 communication module) with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).
Button: "Download to device" on the toolbar.
In the "Project Navigation" window, the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must be
selected in the current project so that the button can be operated.
Note
Device change
The data of all devices (3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 3RW5 HMI High Feature, 3RW5
communication module) is overwritten by the transferred data.

2. Check the transferred data.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 283
Maintenance and service
10.6 "Device change" function

Result
You have transferred your saved data to your devices (3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter,
3RW5 HMI High Feature, 3RW5 communication module) with SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

284 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Technical specifications 11
11.1 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support

Technical data sheet

You can also find the technical data of the product at Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16212/td).
1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the
Enter key.
2. Click the "Technical data" link.

Overview tables technical data

You will find overview tables with technical data in the "Product information" tab in our online
ordering system (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall/en/WW/Catalog/Products/10341685?
tree=CatalogTree).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 285
Technical specifications
11.1 Technical data in Siemens Industry Online Support

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

286 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Dimension drawings 12
12.1 CAx data
You can find the CAx data in the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16212/td).
1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the
Enter key.
2. Click the "CAx data link.

12.2 Drilling pattern for 3RW5 HMI High Feature

The drilling pattern below supports you when installing a 3RW5 HMI High Feature with push-in
lugs on a level surface.







ෘ

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 287
Dimension drawings
12.2 Drilling pattern for 3RW5 HMI High Feature

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

288 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Circuit diagrams 13
13.1 CAx data
You can find the CAx data in the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/16212/td).
1. Enter the full article number of the desired device in the "Product" field, and confirm with the
Enter key.
2. Click the "CAx data link.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 289
Circuit diagrams
13.1 CAx data

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

290 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Example circuits A
A.1 Main circuit connection

A.1.1 Feeder assembly, type of coordination 1 fuseless

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• The motor connection type (Page 95) is parameterized as "Automatic detection" or
"Standard".

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 291
Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

Feeder assembly
Connect the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter at its terminals to the motor feeder between
the motor starter protector and the motor. This achieves coordination type 1.

/
/
/

4

/ / /

4

7 7 7

8 9 :

0 0
3(

Q1 Motor starter protector (e.g. 3RV2 or 3VA)

Q11 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

292 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

A.1.2 Feeder assembly, type of coordination 1 with fuses

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
For the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, note that a Q21 line contactor must be switched on
before the start command so that the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter can run the device test
before switch-on.
• The motor connection type (Page 95) is parameterized as "Automatic detection" or
"Standard".

Feeder assembly
If galvanic isolation is required, install a main or line contactor between the 3RW55 or 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter and the fuses.
Do not connect the main or line contactor between the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and
the motor. The 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter could otherwise display a "Missing load"
error message in the event of a start command and delayed connection of the contactor.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 293
Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

/
/
/

)

4

/ / /

4

7 7 7

8 9 :

0 0
3(

F1 gG full-range fuse for cable and line protection (e.g. 3NA3)

Q21 Main or line contactor for galvanic isolation
Q11 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.1.3 Feeder assembly, type of coordination 2

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• The motor connection type (Page 95) is parameterized as "Automatic detection" or
"Standard".

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

294 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

Feeder assembly
You must provide protection for all power semiconductors against short circuits by means of
special semiconductor fuses (e.g. SITOR fuses from Siemens) to achieve coordination type 2. A
short circuit can occur, for instance, as a result of a defect in the motor windings or in the motor's
power supply cable.

/ /
/ /
/ /

4

) )

/ / / / / /

4 4

7 7 7 7 7 7

8 9 : 8 9 :

0 0 0 0
3( 3(

Q1 Motor starter protector

F3 aR partial-range fuse for protection of semiconductors (e.g. SITOR 3NE3/4 or 3NC3)
F3* gR full-range fuse for protection of semiconductors (e.g. SITOR 3NE1)
Q11 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.1.4 Inside-delta circuit

If the 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is operated in an inside-delta circuit, the motor power
output of the individual devices is increased by a factor of root 3.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 295
Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
For the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, note that a Q21 line contactor must be switched on
before the start command so that the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter can run the device test
before switch-on.
• Motor with windings that can be connected in a delta with line voltage predominating.
• The motor connection type (Page 95) is parameterized as "Automatic detection" or "Inside-
delta".

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

296 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

Motor rotation in line phase direction

/ /
/ /
/ /

4

)

4

)

/ / / / / /

4 4

7 7 7 7 7 7

8 9 : 8 9 :

0 0 0 0
: 8 9 : 8 9

3( 3(

Q1 Motor starter protector

F3 aR partial-range fuse for protection of semiconductors (e.g. SITOR 3NE3/4 or 3NC)
F3* gR full-range fuse for protection of semiconductors (e.g. SITOR 3NE1)
Q11 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
Q21 Main or line contactor for galvanic isolation
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 297
Example circuits
A.1 Main circuit connection

Motor rotation contrary to the line phase direction

/ /
/ /
/ /

4

)

4

)

/ / / / / /

4 4

7 7 7 7 7 7

8 9 : 8 9 :

0 0 0 0
: 8 9 : 8 9

3( 3(

Q1 Motor starter protector

F3 aR partial-range fuse for protection of semiconductors (e.g. SITOR 3NE3/4 or 3NC)
F3* gR full-range fuse for protection of semiconductors (e.g. SITOR 3NE1)
Q11 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
Q21 Main or line contactor for galvanic isolation
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

298 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.2 Control circuit connection

A.2 Control circuit connection

A.2.1 Control by PLC

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a
Standard circuit)
• Parameterization required

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 299
Example circuits
A.2 Control circuit connection

Wiring of control circuit for control by PLC

/ /
/
3 /
4
)
3 636 636
4
0 287387 ,1387

/ / /

12
12

12

',

',

',
',


/
0
$

4 4

7 7 7

7
7
8 9 :



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

0
0
3(
1

F1 Fuse
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 PLC
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.2.2 Control by switch

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a
Standard circuit)
• Parameterization required

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

300 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.2 Control circuit connection

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

Wiring of control circuit for control by switch

/
/ /
/
) 4
6 6
12
12

12

',

',

',
',


/
0
$

4 / / /

4
7
7

7 7 7




12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

8 9 :

3

1
0
0
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off
S4 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 301
Example circuits
A.2 Control circuit connection

A.2.3 Actuation of a line contactor

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

302 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.2 Control circuit connection

Wiring of control circuit for controlling a line contactor

The example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a Standard circuit.

/
/
/
/
)
6 6 4

12

12
12

4

',

',

',
',


/

0
$

4 / / /

4

7
7
7 7 7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

8 9 :

4 3 0
0
1 3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Line contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.2.4 Connecting the temperature sensor

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• Motor with temperature switch (e.g. Thermoclick) or thermistor (e.g. PTC type A)
• Parameterization required

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 303
Example circuits
A.2 Control circuit connection

Note
3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with thermistor motor protection in Class I and Class
II Hazardous Locations
Note that operation of a 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with thermistor motor protection
in Class I and Class II Hazardous Locations is only possible with a thermistor (e.g. PTC Type A).
You will find further information on the operation of motors in Class I and Class II Hazardous
Locations in chapters ATEX/IECEx-certified motor overload protection (Page 16)
and Temperature sensor (Page 169).

Procedure
1. Connect the temperature sensor:

Temperature switch at terminals T1-T2 Thermistor at terminals T1-T2

7 7 7 7

˽ ˽

2. Parameterize the temperature sensor (Page 169).

Result
The 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters monitor the motor for excessive temperature. If the
temperature is exceeded, a warning is generated or the motor is switched off depending upon
the parameterization. Restarting takes place after a reset.

A.2.5 Connecting the evaluation unit to the analog output

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
• Evaluation unit for displaying the analog output signal
• Parameterized analog output (Page 202)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

304 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Procedure
Connect the evaluation unit:

Disconnect the voltage at terminals AQ U+ / AQ- Disconnect the current at terminals AQ I+ / AQ-

$4, $48 $4 $4, $48 $4

9 $

Result
The specified measured value is shown on the evaluation unit via the analog output.

A.3 Special applications

A.3.1 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe soft starters in Ex operation

A.3.1.1 Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline) in Ex operation

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter)
• Parameterization required

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 305
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

DANGER
Loss of the certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Note that operation of a 3RW55 soft starter in the motor connection type "Standard" without
implementing one of the two following remedial measures for the following line voltages
results in loss of certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx (does not apply to
3RW55 Failsafe soft starters):
• Soft starter 200 - 480 V: for line voltage > 440 V (+10%)
• Soft starter 200 - 600 V: for line voltage > 500 V (+10%)
• Soft starter 200 - 690 V: for line voltage > 560 V (+10%)
Depending on the structure of the circuit, choose one of the following possibilities for ensuring
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx:
• Use an additional line contactor in the main circuit.
Connect the line contactor at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
• For a motor feeder configuration with a circuit breaker, use an additional undervoltage trip
unit.
Connect the undervoltage trip unit at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Connecting (Page 71).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

306 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline) in Ex operation with additional line
contactor

/
/ /
) /
6 6 4

12

12
12

',

',

',
4

',


/

0
$

4
/ / /

4

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

7 7 7

8 9 :
3 4

1
0 0
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Line contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.1.2 Type of motor connection "inside delta" in Ex operation

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the examples show the 3RW55 soft starter)
• Parameterization required

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 307
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

DANGER
Loss of the certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx.
Will cause death or serious injury.
Note that operation of a 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with motor connection type
"Inside-delta" without implementing one of the two following remedial measures results in loss
of certified motor overload protection according to ATEX/IECEx:
Depending on the structure of the circuit, choose one of the following possibilities for ensuring
certified motor overload protection according to ATEX / IECEx:
• Use an additional line contactor in the main circuit (in the supply cable or in the delta
connection).
Connect the line contactor at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
• For a motor feeder configuration with a circuit breaker, use an additional undervoltage trip
unit.
Connect the undervoltage trip unit at outputs 95, 96 and 98 (output 3).
You will find more information in chapter Connecting (Page 71).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

308 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for the inside-delta circuit in Ex operation with additional line contactor in the delta
/
/ /
/
)
6 6 4

12

12
12

',

',

',
',


/

0
$

4

)
/ / /

4

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

7 7 7

8 9 :
3 4

1 0 0
3( : 8 9

4

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Line contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor
F3* aR partial-range fuse for protection of semiconductors, e.g. SITOR 3NE3/4 or 3NC (optional)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 309
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for inside-delta circuit in Ex operation with additional line contactor (fuse-protected
configuration)
/
/ /
/
)
6 6

)
12

12
12

4

',

',

',
',


/

0
$

4

/ / /

4

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

7 7 7

8 9 :
3 4

1 0 0
: 8 9
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Line contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor
F3 gR full-range fuse for protection of semiconductors, e.g. SITOR 3NE1

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

310 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

A.3.2 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC
braking with one braking contactor

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

Use the "DC braking with external braking contactor" function if applications with larger mass
inertias (centrifugal masses) have to be stopped (Jload ≤ 5 x Jmotor).
If you select the stopping function "DC braking with external braking contactor", you additionally
require a braking contactor. Set the output 1 to "DC braking contactor". If you select the stopping
function "Dynamic DC braking without contactor", you do not require a braking contactor.
You will find further information in chapter DC braking with external braking contactors
(Page 154).

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required
• The 3RW55 soft starter used meets the requirements of the following table:

Size Article number of the Number of required ex‐ Number of required ex‐
3RW55 soft starter ternal braking contac‐ ternal braking contac‐
tors up to 400 V tors higher than 400 V
Size 1 3RW551.-..... 1 or 2 2
Size 2 3RW5521-.....
3RW5524-.....

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 311
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC braking with one
braking contactor

/
/ /
/
3
4
)

3 636 636

4
0 287387 ,1387

)

/ / /

12
12

12

',

',

',
',


/
0
$

4
4

7 7 7

7
7

4 4



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

 

4
8 9 :
1
0 0
3(

F1 Fuse
F3 Fuse
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 PLC
Q93 Braking contactor
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

312 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

A.3.3 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC
braking with 2 braking contactors

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

Use the "DC braking with external braking contactor" function if applications with larger mass
inertias (centrifugal masses) have to be stopped (Jload ≤ 5 x Jmotor).
If you select the stopping function "DC braking with external braking contactor", you additionally
require 2 braking contactors. Set the output 1 to "DC braking contactor". If you select the
stopping function "Dynamic DC braking without contactor", you do not require a braking
contactor.
You will find further information in chapter DC braking with external braking contactors
(Page 154)

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required
• The 3RW55 soft starter used meets the requirements of the following table:

Size Article number of the Number of required ex‐ Number of required ex‐
3RW55 soft starter ternal braking contac‐ ternal braking contac‐
tors up to 400 V tors higher than 400 V
Size 1 3RW551.-..... 1 or 2 2
Size 2 3RW5521-.....
3RW5524-.....
3RW5525-..... 2
3RW5526-.....
3RW5527-.....
Size 3 3RW553.-.....
Size 4 3RW554.-.....
Size 5 3RW555.-.....

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 313
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and stopping function DC braking with
2 braking contactors

4


:
/ / /

7 7 7


4

0
9
8
4

0
4

3(
/
/
/

)
636
,1387

', 7

7
287387

',
636

', $4
$48
',
$4,
3

0
4

/

12 
1&

12
12 

12 
3

.

$ $
)

4
/

4
.

4
.

4

1
4

F1 Fuse
F3 Fuse
K4 Auxiliary relay K4, e.g.:
LZS: RT4A4T30 (AC 230 V rated control supply voltage),
LZS: RT4A4S15 (AC 115 V rated control supply voltage)
Q1 Motor starter protector

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

314 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Q11 3RW55 soft starter

Q21 PLC
Q91 Braking contactor
Q92 Braking contactor
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.4 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit with soft starting, soft stopping
and the additional function "Creep speed"

Note
Do not use the "Creep speed" function in continuous operation The motor can heat up
impermissibly in continuous operation at Creep speed.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required
You will find further information in chapter Creep speed (Page 172).

Procedure
1. Set the function of the digital inputs:
– DI1 Motor CW with PS1
– DI2: Motor CCW with PS1
– DI3: Creep speed
– DI4: Reset (factory setting)
2. Set the creep speed parameters in parameter set 1.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 315
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit with soft starting, soft stopping and the
additional function "Creep speed" in both directions of rotation with one parameter set

:
7
/

0
7
/

9
/

7

8
)

4

0
4

3(
/
/
/

8
$
$
.

8
6

$
$
.

8
6

$
$
.
6

',

7
6

',
7
',
.

$4
$48
',
. .

$4,
0
/

12 
1&

12
12 

12 

$ $
4
)

1
/

F1 Fuse
F3 Fuse

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

316 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

K1 Contactor relay
K2 Contactor relay
K3 Contactor relay
S1 Pushbutton: Reset
S2 Switch: Start slowly CW
S3 Switch: Start slowly CCW
S4 Switch: Start CW soft start
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.5 Control via fieldbus with switchover to manual local operation

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter)
• Parameterization required
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with an additional 3RW5 communication module
connected via fieldbus
You will find further information in the manual for the 3RW5 communication module in
question.

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 317
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for control via fieldbus with switchover to manual local operation
The example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a Standard circuit.

/
/
/
) /
6
4

12 6 6

12
12

',

',

',
',
)


/

0
$

4

/ / /

4

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

7 7 7

8 9 :

3
0 0
1
3(

F1 Fuse
F3 Fuse
S1 Switch: Manual mode local
S2 Switch: Start / stop (manual mode local)
S3 Switch: Reset (manual mode local)
P1 Indicator light
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter via fieldbus (e.g. PROFINET)
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.6 Pump cleaning function

A.3.6.1 Pump cleaning function with creep speed

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

318 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

You will find further information in chapter Pump cleaning function (Page 182) and on the
Internet under the FAQs (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109761112).

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

Wiring of the control circuit with pump cleaning function with creep speed
The example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a Standard circuit.

/
/ /
/
) 4
6 6 6
12
12

12

',

',

',
',


/
0
$

4 / / /

4
7
7

7 7 7




12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

8 9 :

3

1
0
0
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off
S2 Activate pump cleaning
S4 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 319
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

A.3.6.2 Pump cleaning function with reversing contactor

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a
Standard circuit)
• Parameterization required
You will find further information in chapter Pump cleaning function (Page 182) and on the
Internet under the FAQs (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109761112).

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

320 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring of the control circuit with pump cleaning function with reversing switching element

/
/ /
) /
4 4
6
4

6 6 6 I >> I >> I >>

12

12
12

',

',

',
',


/

0
$

4
4 4

/ / /

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

4

4 4
7 7 7
8 9 :
4 4

1
0 0
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off CW
S2 Switch: Motor On / Off CCW
S3 Activate pump cleaning
S4 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Reversing switching element - right
Q22 Reversing switching element - left
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 321
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

A.3.7 Reversing duty

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter)
• Parameterization required:
– The input action DI1 is set to "Motor CW".
– The input action DI2 is set to "Motor CCW".
– The input action DI3 is set to "Manual operation local".
– The input action DO1 is set to "Reversing switching element - right".
– The input action DO21 is set to "Reversing switching element - left".

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

322 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for reversing duty:

/
/ /
) /
4 4
6
4

6 6 I >> I >> I >>

12

12
12

',

',

',
',


/

0
$

4
4 4

/ / /

7
7
4



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

4 4
7 7 7
8 9 :
4 4

1
0 0
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Motor On / Off CW
S2 Switch: Motor On / Off CCW
S3 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Reversing switching element - right
Q22 Reversing switching element - left
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.8 3RW55 soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter sets

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 323
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

Note
Set the stopping mode "Coasting down" on the 3RW55 soft starter.
Make sure that the input actions are parameterized each with its own parameter set:
• "Motor CW with PS1" for input DI1
• "Motor CW with PS2" for input DI2
• "Motor CW with PS3" for input DI3
• "Reset" for input DI4 (optional)
Make sure that the output actions are parameterized as "Operation / Bypass".

Note
In the case of increased operating sequences, set the dimensions for the 3RW55 soft starters to
at least one capacity level higher than the highest connected motor output.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

324 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for 3RW55 soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter sets - main circuit

:

0
9
8
)

4

)

0

3(
4

:

0
9
8
)

4

)

0

3(
4

:

0
9
8
)

4

)

0

3(
/

7
/

7
/

7
)

4
/
/
/

4

F1 Fuse
F2 Fuse, motor 1
F3 Fuse, motor 2
F4 Fuse, motor 3

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 325
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

F6 Overload relay, motor 1

F7 Overload relay, motor 2
F8 Overload relay, motor 3
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Starting contactor, motor 1
Q22 Line contactor, motor 1
Q31 Starting contactor, motor 2
Q32 Line contactor, motor 2
Q41 Starting contactor, motor 3
Q42 Line contactor, motor 3
M1 Motor 1
M2 Motor 2
M3 Motor 3
PE Protective conductor

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

326 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for 3RW55 soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter sets - control circuit

8
4




$
$
4

4

8
4
4

$
$
4

4
4
)

6

4
6

8
4 4





$
$
4

8
4
4

$
$
4

4
)

4
6

4
6

8
4 4





$
$
4

8
4
4

$
$
4

4
4
)

6

4
6

$
$
)

+
)

)

', 7
6
)

', 7
4



/

', $4
4 4


$48
',
$4,
4

0
/

12 
1&

12
12 

12 

$ $
4

F2 Fuse
F3 Fuse

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 327
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

F4 Fuse
S3 Pushbutton: Reset
S10 Pushbutton: Motor 1 Start
S11 Pushbutton: Motor 1 Stop
S20 Pushbutton: Motor 2 Start
S21 Pushbutton: Motor 2 Stop
S30 Pushbutton: Motor 3 Start
S31 Pushbutton: Motor 3 Stop
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Starting contactor, motor 1
Q22 Line contactor, motor 1
Q31 Starting contactor, motor 2
Q32 Line contactor, motor 2
Q41 Starting contactor, motor 3
Q42 Line contactor, motor 3
H1 Indicator light

A.3.9 Soft starter for pole-changing motor with separate windings and 2 parameter
sets

Requirements
• 3RW55 or 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (the example shows the 3RW55 soft starter)
• Parameterization required
Note
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW5.

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

328 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for soft starter for pole-changing motor with separate windings and 2 parameter sets

4

3(
,!! ,!! ,!!

7 7 7

/ / /

9 :

9 :
0
8

8
4

8
4
4
/
/
/

$

$
4

4

8
.

$

$
.

8
4

$

$
4
13($&9+]

4
)

6

6
6




3
 


3
/




3
4

7

', 7
',
6

', $4
4 4

', $48
$4,
0

/

$ $
1
4

F1 Fuse
S1 Pushbutton: Start, low speed

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 329
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

S2 Pushbutton: Start, high speed

S3 Pushbutton: Reset
S4 Pushbutton: Stop motor
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Main contactor for low speed
Q31 Main contactor for high speed
K1 Contactor relay for switching delay (response delay 500 ms)
M Motor
PE Protective conductor
P1 Indicator light: Motor rotates at low speed
P2 Indicator light: Motor rotates at high speed
P3 Indicator light: Error

A.3.10 3RW55 soft starter with direct-on-line starting (DOL) as emergency start

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
• Parameterization required

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

330 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring for 3RW55 soft starter with direct-on-line starting (DOL) as emergency start
The example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a Standard circuit.

/ /
) /
/
6 4

,!! ,!! ,!!

6 6 6
12

12
12

',
',

',
',


/

0
$

4
/ / /

4 4

7 7 7

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

4

8 9 :

1
0 0

3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Selector switch Soft starting / direct-on-line starting
S2 Switch: Start / stop (3RW55 soft starter)
S3 Pushbutton: Reset
S4 Switch: Direct on-line starting (DOL)
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Line contactor
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.11 Starting a Dahlander motor

Requirements
• ON / RUN relay output was parameterized to ON.
• No soft stop possible. Set the ramp-down time 0 s at the setting element

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 331
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

332 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring
/
)
4

   
,!! ,!! ,!!
4
/ / /

4
    

7 7 7
4 4 6
6
5HVHW
. . 4 4

6 4 . )

8 9 :
6
4
$
+
$
+
$ 4
0 0
+
$ $ $ 4 8 9 :
4

$ / 0 ', ', ', ', 7 7 $ $ $ $

4 . 4 4
4 $ $ $ $
$
8 8 8 8

F1 Fuse
K1 Contactor relay for switching delay (response delay 500 ms)
S1 Pushbutton: Start, low speed
S2 Pushbutton: Start, high speed
S3 Pushbutton: Reset
S4 Pushbutton: Motor stop
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Line contactor: Low speed
Q31 Line contactor: High speed
Q32 Star (wye) contactor: High speed
H1 Indicator light: Fault
H2 Indicator light: Low motor speed
H3 Indicator light: High speed
M1 Motor
DI1 Motor CW parameter data set 1
DI2 Motor CW parameter data set 2
DI4 Reset

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 333
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

A.3.12 External bypass

Requirements
• Parameter "Tripping class" is set to "CLASS OFF".
• Parameter "Bypass operation mode" (in menu "Additional parameters") is set to "External
bypass".
• Parameter "Output action" of the output at which the external bypass contactor is connected
is set to "External bypass".
• External bypass contactor
• External overload relay

NOTICE
Material damage due to overload
If an external bypass is used, the intrinsic device protection and the motor overload
protection will be deactivated. This can result in damage to the soft starter or the motor due
to overload.
Use an additional external overload protection to protect the soft starter and the motor from
damage due to overload.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

334 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring
L1 L2 L3
L/+ L/+
1 3 5

-F1 1

2 4 6 -F1
2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
-Q22
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
NO NO
13 23 11
1 3 5 13 -Q11 -Q11 -Q1
-Q1 14 24 12
2 4 6
-S1 14
1
13
A1 x1 A1
U

-S2 14 -Q21 -P1 -Q22

A2 x2 A2
2

-Q11 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 L+ M DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

-Q21 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 >

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 A2 T1 T2 AQ I+ AQ U+ AQ-

L/- L/-
U1 V1 W1

-M1 M
3~
PE

PE PE

F1 Fuse
S1 Pushbutton: Switch: Motor On / Off
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 External overload relay
Q11 3RW5 soft starter
Q21 External bypass contactor
Q22 Main contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor
PE Protective conductor

A.3.13 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 1 or PL c with a 3SK1 safety relay without
the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

The 3RW55 soft starter has no effect or influence on the safety function of the application. For
this reason, it is neither positively nor negatively considered in the safety application, and also
does not have to be included in the calculation for proof according to the standards.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 335
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
For the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, refer to chapter 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 343).
• If the soft stop function is set (stopping time setting element set to > 0 s) and the EMERGENCY
STOP circuit is tripped, a "Missing load" error message may be indicated on the 3RW55 soft
starter. Use Reset to reset the error message.

Basic configuration
If achievement of SILCL 1 according to IEC 62061 / PL c according to EN ISO 13849‑1 is required,
the series connection of an additional contactor with the 3RW55 soft starter, together with a
suitable safety relay (e.g.: 3SK1111), is required, as well as monitoring of the contactor's
auxiliary contacts.

/ //


 

① EMERGENCY STOP
② 3RT20 contactor
③ 3RW55 soft starter
④ Motor
⑤ 3SK1 safety relay

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

336 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring of the 3RW55 soft starter

The example shows the 3RW55 soft starter with a Standard circuit.

/
/ /
/
) 4
6 6

4
4
12
12

12

',

',

',
',


/
0
$

4 / / /

4

7
7
7 7 7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

8 9 :

3

1
0
0
3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Start/stop
S4 Pushbutton: Reset > 4 s
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 337
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring of the 3SK1 safety relay SIL 1 with line contactor

/
6
6 )

4 4


. $ 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1    

)6

/RJLF
$XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW

$    

4

/

F2 Fuse
Q11 Line contactor
Q21 Contactor
S3 Start button
S4 EMERGENCY STOP
K1 3SK1111 safety relay

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

338 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring of the 3SK1 safety relay SIL 1 without line contactor

/
6
6 )

4

. $ 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1    

)6

/RJLF
$XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW

$    

4

/

F2 Fuse
Q21 Contactor
S3 Start button
S4 EMERGENCY STOP
K1 3SK1111 safety relay

A.3.14 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 3 or PL e with a 3SK1 safety relay

without the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

The 3RW55 soft starter has no effect or influence on the safety function of the application. For
this reason, it is neither positively nor negatively considered in the safety application, and also
does not have to be included in the calculation for proof according to the standards.

Requirements
• 3RW55 soft starter
For the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, refer to chapter 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 343).
• If the soft stop function is set (stopping time setting element set to > 0 s) and the EMERGENCY
STOP circuit is tripped, a "Missing load" error message may be indicated on the 3RW55 soft
starter. Use Reset to reset the error message.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 339
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Basic configuration
Safe shutdown up to SILCL 3 according to IEC 62061 / PL e according to EN ISO 13849‑1 requires
the use of 2 redundant contactors and monitoring of the auxiliary contacts of both contactors.
Two-channel monitoring of the EMERGENCY STOP is also required here.

/ //


① EMERGENCY STOP
② 3RT20 contactors
③ 3RW55 soft starter
④ Motor
⑤ 3SK1 safety relay

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

340 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring of the 3RW55 soft starter

/
/
/ /

6 6 4
)

4

4 4
12
12

12

',

',

',
',
 4

/
0
$

4
/ / /

4

7
7



12

1&


$4
$4,
$48
$

7 7 7

3
8 9 :

0
1
0

3(

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Start/stop
S4 Pushbutton: Reset > 4 s
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 soft starter
Q21 Contactor
Q22 Contactor
P1 Indicator light
M1 Motor

WARNING
Automatic restart.
Can cause death or serious injury.
If a starting command is pending, a restart will be triggered automatically after the reset. This
particularly applies if the motor protection has tripped. Dangerous states of the system can
result.
Reset the start command (e.g. via the PLC or switch) before performing a reset.
To do this, for example, link the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 341
Example circuits
A.3 Special applications

Wiring of the 3SK1 safety relay SIL 3 with line contactor

/

6 6 ) )

4 4

4

. $ 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1    

)6

/RJLF
$XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW

$    

4 4

/

F2 Fuse
F3 Fuse
Q11 Line contactor
Q21 Contactor
Q22 Contactor
S3 Start button
S4 EMERGENCY STOP
K1 3SK1111 safety relay

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

342 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Wiring of the 3SK1 safety relay SIL 3 without line contactor

/

6 6 ) )

4

4

. $ 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1    

)6

/RJLF
$XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW

$    

4 4

/

F2 Fuse
F3 Fuse
Q21 Contactor
Q22 Contactor
S3 Start button
S4 EMERGENCY STOP
K1 3SK1111 safety relay

A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Requirements
• 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 343
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

WARNING
Loss of the safety function due to restricted diagnostics.
Can cause death or serious injury.
For diagnostics, the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must always be directly connected to the main
supply voltage (operational voltage).
For diagnostics, always connect the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter directly to the main supply
voltage (operational voltage). Additional contact elements (e.g. a redundant contactor) must
only be connected in series behind the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

Note
Compliance with the maximum permissible switching cycles
The safety values only apply considering the maximum permissible switching cycles (B10) of the
switching devices used.
• SIL1 application: B10 of the soft starter
• SIL3 application: B10 of the soft starter and B10 of the downstream contactor

Note
Function test
In continuous operation, the key safety values apply in the case of a function test interval for
SIL 1 ≤ 1 year and for SIL 3 ≤ 1 month. The function check is part of the self-test (user-test)
(Page 264).

Note
Protection from restarting
Note that, after a safety-related shutoff, an automatic restart cannot be performed.
You will find further information on safety-related shutoff in chapter Failsafe (Page 212).

Note
Cross-circuit proof/short-circuit to power cable proof cable installation
PL e / Cat. 4 according to EN ISO 13849‑1 or SILCL 3 according to IEC 62061 can only be achieved
with cross-circuit proof/short-circuit to power cable proof cable installation between the safety
relay (SIL ≥ 2) and the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter or motor contactor (e.g. as cables in separate
jackets or in a separate cable duct):
• From the safe output of the safety relay to the failsafe digital input F‑DI of the 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter.
• From the failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42; output 4) of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
to the safe input of the safety relay.
• From the safe output of the safety relay to operate the motor contactor.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

344 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Note
Inside a cabinet, the cabling between the safety relay and the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and
between the safety relay and the redundant switching element (motor contactor) can be
installed in 1 duct. This is also permissible up to SIL 3 / PL e because the cable installation inside
the cabinet is short-circuit to power cable/short-circuit proof (fault exclusion according to EN
ISO 13849‑2).

A.4.1 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 1 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
With the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, STO applications up to integrity level SILCL 1 according to
IEC 62061 and PL c / Cat. 2 according to EN ISO 13849 can be implemented without having to
use further devices (one-channel shutdown by the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter). The shutdown
command at the failsafe digital input F‑DI of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter can come from a
directly connected EMERGENCY STOP command device or from a safe output of a higher-level
safety relay.
Note the requirements in chapter 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 343).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 345
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Basic configuration

  / / /

 ',
)',
)54

① EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton 3SU1

② Selector switch 3SU1
③ 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
④ Motor
⑤ Indicator light
ON: The device has no defect.
OFF: The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is not ready to start (Page 212).
DI Digital input
F‑DI Failsafe digital input
F‑RQ Failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42; output 4)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

346 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Wiring with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

The example shows the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with a Standard circuit.

/ /
/ /
/

4
12 6 6 6

12

1&

)',

',
',
',
',
/

$

0
4

/ / /

4


12
1&

)0

$48
$

7

7




$4,

$4

7 7 7

8 9 :
3

/ 0 0
1
3(

S1 Switch: Start/stop
S2 Pushbutton: EMERGENCY OFF
S3 Pushbutton: Reset
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
M1 Motor
P1 Indicator light
PE Protective conductor

A.4.2 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
without coupling of the digital input DI to the failsafe digital input F-DI
Together with an additional motor contactor connected between the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
and motor, two-channel STO applications can be implemented with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter up to integrity level SILCL 3 according to IEC 62061 and PL e / Cat. 4 according to
EN ISO 13849‑1 (two-channel shutdown using the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in one of the two
channels). The safe signaling output (F‑RQ) of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and the auxiliary
contacts of the contactor are monitored by a higher-level safety relay with SIL ≥ 2 (e.g. 3SK1).
The control commands at the failsafe digital input F‑DI of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and at
the contactor come from 2 failsafe outputs of the higher-level safety relay.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 347
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Requirements
• Note the requirements in chapter 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 343).
• If the soft stop function is set (stopping time setting element set to > 0 s) and the EMERGENCY
STOP circuit is tripped, a "Missing load" error message may be indicated on the
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter. Use Reset to reset the error message.
• Main supply voltage (operating voltage) is present.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

348 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Basic configuration

 
/ / /


',
 4 )',
,1. )54


,1)
4 0

① EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton 3SU1 for stopping operation

② Pushbutton 3SU1 for enabling the safety function
③ Selector switch 3SU1 for functional switching on and off
④ 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
⑤ 3RT20 contactor
⑥ Motor
⑦ 3SK1 Advanced safety relay
⑧ Indicator light
ON: The device has no defect.
OFF: The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is not ready to start (Page 212).
DI Digital input
F‑DI Failsafe digital input
F‑RQ Failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42; output 4)
M Ground
Q1 Safety-related output 3SK1
Q2 Safety-related output 3SK1

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 349
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

INK Cascading circuit 3SK1

INF Feedback circuit 3SK1

Wiring with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Note
Adaptation of the output current at the failsafe output Q2
If the maximum permissible output current at the failsafe output Q2 of the 3SK1 safety relay is
not sufficient, use a coupling link and adapt the magnitude of the output current to switch on
the required contactor Q21.
Alternatively, use a 3SK1 safety relay with relay outputs for this.

The example shows the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with a Standard circuit.

:
/

7

0
/

7

9
7

8
/
4

4

0

3(
4
/
/
/

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

350 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

3
40

4

4

4
4

/RJLF

_VLQJOHFKVHQVRUVGRXEOHFKVHQVRU
,16

,1)
6

_&URVVIDXOWGHWHFWLRQ2))21
7

_$XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW

_6WDUWXS7HVW\HVQR
,1

3$5

7

6(75(6(7
,1

,1.
6

$ $

6<6
.


',
7
',
6

',
7
',
6

$4
0
$48
/ $4,

)0
)',

1& 
1&

/

12
/

12 
12 

$ $
)

4
/

① Difference to the wiring in chapter EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter with coupling of the digital input DI to the failsafe digital input F-DI (Page 352). In this
example of a circuit, no ground connection is required at terminal M because the digital inputs
DI1 ... DI4 are supplied from the sensor supply L+.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 351
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Start/stop
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
S3 Pushbutton: EMERGENCY OFF
S4 Pushbutton: Monitored start (safety relay)
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
Q21 Contactor
K Safety relay
M1 Motor
P1 Indicator light
PE Protective conductor

When the EMERGENCY OFF (S3) pushbutton is pressed, the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter performs
the "Safe Torque Off" (STO) safety function. Execution of this safety function is signaled on the
display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature with the message text "Safety-related shutoff". After
EMERGENCY OFF (S3) has been reset, the safety relay (K) must also be reset with the Monitored
Start pushbutton (safety relay) (S4). Note that for a further start, the start/stop switch (S1) on
the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must also be switched off and on again.

A.4.3 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
with coupling of the digital input DI to the failsafe digital input F-DI
Together with an additional motor contactor connected between the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
and motor, two-channel STO applications can be implemented with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter up to integrity level SILCL 3 according to IEC 62061 and PL e / Cat. 4 according to
EN ISO 13849‑1 (two-channel shutdown using the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in one of the two
channels). The safe signaling output (F‑RQ) of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and the auxiliary
contacts of the contactor are monitored by a higher-level safety relay with SIL ≥ 2 (e.g. 3SK1).
The control commands at the failsafe digital input F‑DI of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and at
the contactor come from 2 failsafe outputs of the higher-level safety relay.

Requirements
• Note the requirements in chapter 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 343).
• If the soft stop function is set (stopping time setting element set to > 0 s) and the EMERGENCY
STOP circuit is tripped, a "Missing load" error message may be indicated on the 3RW55
Failsafe soft starter. Use Reset to reset the error message.
• Main supply voltage (operating voltage) is present.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

352 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Basic configuration

 
/ / /


',
 4 )',
,1. )54


,1)
4 0

① EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton 3SU1 for stopping operation

② Pushbutton 3SU1 for enabling the safety function
③ Selector switch 3SU1 for functional switching on and off
④ 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
⑤ 3RT20 contactor
⑥ Motor
⑦ 3SK1 Advanced safety relay
⑧ Indicator light
ON: The device has no defect.
OFF: The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter is not ready to start (Page 212).
DI Digital input
F‑DI Failsafe digital input
F‑RQ Failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42; output 4)
M Ground
Q1 Safety-related output 3SK1
Q2 Safety-related output 3SK1

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 353
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

INK Cascading circuit 3SK1

INF Feedback circuit 3SK1

Wiring with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Note
Adaptation of the output current at the failsafe output Q2
If the maximum permissible output current at the failsafe output Q2 of the 3SK1 safety relay is
not sufficient, use a coupling link and adapt the magnitude of the output current to switch on
the required contactor Q21.
Alternatively, use a 3SK1 safety relay with relay outputs for this.

The example shows the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter with a Standard circuit.

:
/

7

0
/

7

9
7

8
/
4

4

0

3(
4
/
/
/

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

354 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

3
40

4

4

4
4

/RJLF

_VLQJOHFKVHQVRUVGRXEOHFKVHQVRU
,16

,1)
6

_&URVVIDXOWGHWHFWLRQ2))21
7

_$XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW

_6WDUWXS7HVW\HVQR
,1

3$5

7

6(75(6(7
,1

,1.
6

$ $

6<6
.


',
7
',
6

',
7
',
6

$4
0
$48
/ $4,

)0
)',

1& 
1&

/

12
/

12 
12 

$ $
)

4
/

① Difference to the wiring in chapter EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter without coupling of the digital input DI to the failsafe digital input F-DI (Page 347). In
this example of a circuit, terminal M has to be connected to L- because digital input DI1 is supplied
with external voltage (L+).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 355
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

F1 Fuse
S1 Switch: Start/stop
S2 Pushbutton: Reset
S3 Pushbutton: EMERGENCY OFF
S4 Pushbutton: Monitored start (safety relay)
Q1 Motor starter protector
Q11 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
Q21 Contactor
K Safety relay
M1 Motor
P1 Indicator light
PE Protective conductor

When the EMERGENCY OFF (S3) pushbutton is pressed, the signals at the digital inputs DI and
F‑DI are canceled simultaneously. The 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter executes the "Safe Torque Off"
(STO) safety function, which however is not shown in the display of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature.
After EMERGENCY OFF (S3) has been reset, the safety relay (K) must also be reset with the
Monitored Start pushbutton (safety relay) (S4). If an ON command is still applied at the start/stop
switch (S1), a restart is initiated via the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter.

A.4.4 EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 STO with a 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in
conjunction with bus communication and a safety control
Together with an additional motor contactor connected between the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
and motor, two-channel STO applications can be implemented with the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter up to integrity level SILCL 3 according to IEC 62061 and PL e / Cat. 4 according to
EN ISO 13849‑1 (two-channel shutdown using the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter in one of the two
channels). The safe signaling output (F‑RQ) of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter and the auxiliary
contacts of the contactor are monitored by a higher-level safety relay with SIL ≥ 2 (e.g. safety
control). The control commands at the failsafe digital input F‑DI of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
starter and at the contactor come from 2 failsafe outputs of the higher-level safety relay.
Note that the EMERGENCY STOP shutdown must only be performed via the safe outputs (Q1 and
Q2) of a safety control. Both the shutdown of the contactor and the safety-related shutoff (STO)
of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter via the failsafe digital input F‑DI must be performed via a
dedicated safe output (F‑DQ) of a safety control.
The feedback signals of the mirror contact of the contactor and of the failsafe signaling output
(F‑RQ) of the 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter must be made via safe inputs of the safety control. As
an alternative to control via the control inputs (DI), functional switching by the 3RW55 Failsafe
soft starter can also be performed via a suitable 3RW5 communication module (e.g. PROFINET).
Note the requirements in chapter 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter (Page 343).

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

356 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Basic configuration for SIL 1

 
/ / /

4 )',
)54


① EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton 3SU1 for stopping operation

② Pushbutton 3SU1 for enabling the safety function
③ 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
④ Motor
⑤ PROFINET (via 3RW5 PROFINET communication module)
⑥ Safety control
Q1 Safety-related output
F‑DI Failsafe digital input
F‑RQ Failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42; output 4)

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 357
Example circuits
A.4 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter

Basic configuration for SIL 3

 
/ / /

4 )',
)54



4 0




① EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton 3SU1 for stopping operation

② Pushbutton 3SU1 for enabling the safety function
③ 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
④ 3RT20 contactor
⑤ Motor
⑥ Mirror contact
⑦ PROFINET (via 3RW5 PROFINET communication module)
⑧ Safety control
F‑DI Failsafe digital input
F‑RQ Failsafe signaling output (output 41, 42; output 4)
M Ground
Q1 Safety-related output
Q2 Safety-related output

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

358 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Glossary

Ground fault
Fault whereby an external conductor comes into contact with ground or the grounded neutral
point.

GSD
Device master file
This file is required to be able to configure a device as a DP standard slave in the HW Config of a
Siemens or external system.

GSDML
Device master file
This file is required to be able to configure a device as a DN device in the HW Config of a Siemens
or external system.

HSP
Hardware support package
The hardware support packages allow you to configure modules that are not listed in the
hardware catalog of your TIA Portal installation.

PII / PIQ
Process image input/process image output

Process image
Image of the signal states of the digital inputs and outputs in the memory of a controller.
The process images can be transferred as follows:
• Cyclically in the fieldbus protocol
• Acyclically using data sets

STS
Simulation Tool for Soft Starters

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 359
Glossary

The soft starter can be configured with the STS (Simulation Tool for Soft Starters) software. The
STS suggests suitable soft starters for the application based on the motor and load data and
application requirements that you enter.

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

360 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
Index
First commissioning, 125
Intrinsic device protection, 171
3 Logbooks, 265
Maintenance and repairs, 269
3RW5 HMI High Feature, 28
Motor parameters, 95
Communication diagnostics, 263
Mounting, 55
Configuring the Function selection key F1-F9, 117
Mounting on a level surface, 56
Control, 232
Mounting terminal covers, 76
Control cabinet door, 64
Mounting the cover of the control cable duct, 86
Device design and controls, 98
Parameterizing, 89
Device LED, 249
Removing the cover of the control cable duct, 87
Diagnostics on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, 263
Replacement of the box terminal blocks with size
Diagnostics on the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
2, 78
starter, 257
Replacing the control terminals, 84
Diagnostics on the 3RW55 soft starter, 257
Sealing, 126
Download language, 245
Warnings and remedial measures, 250
Factory setting, 279
3RW55 soft starter
Faults and remedial actions, 256
Connect main circuit connection (line side/motor
Firmware update, 277
side), 75
First commissioning, 127
Connecting, 74
Graphical display of measured values, 229
Connecting the control terminals (screw
Installing, 61, 64
terminals), 80
Level surface, 62
Connecting the control terminals (spring-loaded
Logbooks, 265
terminals), 82
Menu, 100
Device LEDs, 248
Micro SD card, 243
Disconnecting the control current form the screw
Monitoring, 227, 231
terminals, 81
Mounting, 62
Disconnecting the control current from the spring-
Overview, 234
loaded terminal, 83
Parameterizing, 121
Errors and remedial actions, 252
Removing, 60
First commissioning, 125
Save service data to micro SD card, 266
Intrinsic device protection, 171
Start key, 119
Logbooks, 265
Status LED, 249
Maintenance and repairs, 269
User login and logout, 242
Motor parameters, 95
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter
Mounting, 55
Connect main circuit connection (line side/motor
Mounting on a level surface, 56
side), 75
Mounting terminal covers, 76
Connecting, 74
Mounting the cover of the control cable duct, 86
Connecting the control terminals (screw
Parameterizing, 89
terminals), 80
Removing the cover of the control cable duct, 87
Connecting the control terminals (spring-loaded
Replacement of the box terminal blocks with size
terminals), 82
2, 78
Device LEDs, 248
Replacing the control terminals, 84
Disconnecting the control current form the screw
Sealing, 126
terminals, 81
Warnings and remedial measures, 250
Disconnecting the control current from the spring-
3RW55 soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter
loaded terminal, 83
sets, 323
Errors and remedial actions, 252
Failsafe, 20, 212, 213, 343

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 361
Index

3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and Circuit diagram example, 331, 334
stopping function with DC braking with 2 braking 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and
contactors, 313 stopping function with DC braking with 2 braking
3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and contactors, 313
stopping function with DC braking with one braking 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit and
contactor, 311 stopping function with DC braking with one
3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit with soft braking contactor, 311
starting, soft stopping and the additional function Actuation of a line contactor, 302
"Creep speed", 315 Connecting the evaluation unit to the analog
3RW55 soft starter with direct-on-line starting (DOL) output, 304
as emergency start, 330 Connecting the temperature sensor, 303
Control by PLC, 299
Control by switch, 300
A EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 1 or PL c with a
3SK1 safety relay without the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
Access options, 30
starter, 335
Access protection
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 or PL e with a
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 126
3SK1 safety relay, 347, 352
3RW55 soft starter, 126
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 3 or PL e
Use of PINs, 237
with a 3SK1 safety relay without the 3RW55
User account administration, 240
Failsafe soft starter, 339
User login and logout, 242
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 3 or PL e
Accessories, 49
with a safety control, 356
Active power monitoring, 177
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 1 or
Actuation of a line contactor, 302
PL c, 345
Additional parameters, 214
Feeder assembly, coordination type 1
Bypass operating mode, 214
fuseless, 291
Alternative stopping, 163
Feeder assembly, coordination type 1 with
Analog output, 202
fuses, 293
Analog output AQ
Feeder assembly, coordination type 2, 294
PLC, 205
Pump cleaning function with creep speed, 318
Application wizard, 92
Pump cleaning function with reversing switching
Applications, 43
element, 320
Asymmetry, 186
Coasting down, 148
ATEX/IECEx, 16, 305, 307
Communication modules, 51
Ex operation, 207
Complete motor protection, 166
Notes, 16
Condition monitoring, 174
Automatic parameterization, 132
Active power monitoring, 177
Current monitoring, 175
Pump cleaning function, 182
B Starting time monitoring, 181
Box terminal block Switching frequency monitoring, 178
Replacing, 78 Configuring
Breakaway pulse for startup functions, 144 Function selection key F1-F9, 117
Bypass operating mode, 214 Start key, 119
Connecting the evaluation unit to the analog
output, 304
C Connecting the temperature sensor, 303
Connections
Catalog, 12
Overview, 71, 73
Control, 232
Control by PLC, 299

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

362 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Index

Control by switch, 300 Example circuits

Control via fieldbus with switchover to manual local 3RW55 soft starter for serial starting with
operation, 317 3 parameter sets, 323
Creep speed, 172 3RW55 soft starter in standard (inline) circuit with
Current monitoring, 175 soft starting, soft stopping and the additional
Cyclic send data, 205 function "Creep speed", 315
3RW55 soft starter with direct-on-line starting
(DOL) as emergency start, 330
D Control via fieldbus with switchover to manual
local operation, 317
Data transfer, 30
Inside-delta circuit, 295
Date and time
Inside-delta circuit in Ex operation with additional
Setting, 218
line contactor (fuse-protected configuration), 307
DC braking
Inside-delta circuit in Ex operation with additional
Sensorless motor standstill detection, 162
line contactor in the delta, 307
DC braking with external braking contactor, 154
Reversing duty, 322
Device change, 281
Type of motor connection "Standard" (inline) in Ex
Micro SD card, 282
operation, 305
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal), 283
External motor standstill detection, 162
Device LEDs
Overview, 247
Device versions, 39
Diagnostics options, 247
F
Digital output actions, 198 Factory setting, 278
Digital outputs, 198 3RW5 HMI High Feature, 279
Direct-on-line starting, 143 Master RESET key, 280
Download language, 245 Options, 279
Dynamic DC braking without contactor, 157 Failsafe, 20, 343
Hardware configuration, 25
Operating principle, 212
E Resetting safety-related shutoff, 213
Fan cover
Edit function favorites, 117
Mounting, 55
Electronic motor overload protection, 166
FAQs, 12
Emergency run, 191
Faults and remedial actions
Emergency start, 189
3RW5 HMI High Feature, 256
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 1 or PL c with a
Feeder assembly, coordination type 1 fuseless, 291
3SK1 safety relay without the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
Feeder assembly, coordination type 1 with fuses, 293
starter, 335
Feeder assembly, coordination type 2, 294
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown to SIL 3 or PL e with a
Firmware update, 22, 275
3SK1 safety relay, 347, 352
First commissioning
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 3 or PL e with a
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 125
3SK1 safety relay without the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
3RW55 soft starter, 125
starter, 339
Function selection key F1-F9
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 3 or PL e with a
Configuring, 117
safety control, 356
Function test, 264
EMERGENCY STOP shutdown up to SIL 1 or PL c, 345
Functions, 26
Errors and remedial actions, 252
Active power monitoring, 177
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 252
Additional parameters, 214
3RW55 soft starter, 252
Analog output, 202
Ex operation, 207
Asymmetry, 186
Automatic parameterization, 132
Breakaway pulse for startup functions, 144

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 363
Index

Coasting down, 148

Complete motor protection, 166
Condition monitoring, 174 I
Creep speed, 172
Input actions, 194
Current monitoring, 175
Inside-delta circuit, 295
Cyclic send data, 205
Interaction interfaces, 30
Date and time, 218
Intrinsic device protection, 171
DC braking with external braking contactor, 154
Digital outputs, 198
Direct-on-line starting, 143
Electronic motor overload protection, 166
K
Emergency run, 191 Knowledge, 23
Emergency start, 189
Ground fault, 187
Input actions, 194 L
Intrinsic device protection, 171
LED test, 264
Motor heating, 143
LEDs
Pump cleaning function, 182
Device LEDs, 247
Pump stopping mode, 152
Status and error displays, 248
Soft starting with torque control, 137
Local access protection (PIN), 237
Soft starting with torque control and current
Change, 239
limiting, 142
Defining, 238
Soft starting with voltage ramp, 134
Delete, 239
Soft starting with voltage ramp and current
Logbooks, 265
limiting, 140
Starting modes, 131
Starting time monitoring, 181
Stopping modes, 146
M
Switching frequency monitoring, 178 Main circuit connection (line side/motor side)
Thermistor motor protection with temperature Connecting, 75
sensor, 169 Main menu
Torque control, 150 Monitoring, 227
Trace function, 220 Overview, 234
User account administration, 240 Maintenance, 269
Manuals, 11
Master RESET key
G Factory setting, 280
Menu of the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, 100
Graphical display of measured values
Messages and diagnosis
Bar chart, 229
Faults and remedial actions of the 3RW5 HMI High
Line chart, 229
Feature, 256
Ground fault, 187
Messages and diagnostics
Communication diagnostics, 263
Diagnostics on the 3RW5 HMI High Feature, 263
H Diagnostics on the 3RW55 Failsafe soft
Hardware configuration, 24 starter, 257
Hinged cover Diagnostics on the 3RW55 soft starter, 257
Replacing, 68 Diagnostics options, 247
History, 23 Logbooks, 265
Status and error displays, 248
Micro SD card, 243
Micro SD card, 277

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

364 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006
 Index

Mode, 32
Monitoring
Measured values, 227 Q
Process image, 231
Quick-stop, 174
Motor
Complete motor protection, 166
Electronic motor overload protection, 166
Thermistor motor protection with temperature
R
sensor, 169 Rated operating speed, 96
Motor connection type, 97 Rated operational current, 96
Motor heating, 143 Rated torque, 96
Motor parameters, 95 Reactive power compensation, 15
Motor standstill detection, 162 References, 11
Mounting, 55 Repairs, 269
Mounting on a level surface, 56 Reset, 173
Reversing duty, 322

O
Online help, 11
S
Operating principle Save service data to micro SD card, 266
Alternative stopping, 163 Screw terminals
Dynamic DC braking without contactor, 157 Connecting, 80
Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor Disconnect the control current, 81
assembly, 160 Sealing
Voltage ramp, 149 3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 126
Overview 3RW55 soft starter, 126
I&M data, 234 Self-test (user-test), 264
Sensorless motor standstill detection, 162
Service factor, 96
P Setting the mode, 35
Simulation, 224
Parameter sets, 91
Simulation Tool for Soft Starters, 44
Parameterizing, 89
SIRIUS Soft Starter ES (TIA Portal), 51
3RW5 HMI High Feature, 121
Trace function, 220
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 89
User account administration, 240
3RW55 soft starter, 89
Soft starting with torque control and current
Application wizard, 92
limiting, 142
Parameters
Soft starting with voltage ramp, 134, 137
Additional parameters, 214
Soft starting with voltage ramp and current
PIN, 237, 242
limiting, 140
Process data, 196
Spring-loaded terminals
Process image input (PII), 196
Connecting, 82
Process image output (PIQ), 196
Disconnect the control current, 83
Process images, 196
Start key
Pump cleaning function, 182
Configuring, 119
Pump cleaning function with creep speed, 318
Starting modes, 131
Pump cleaning function with reversing switching
Breakaway pulse for startup functions, 144
element, 320
Direct-on-line starting, 143
Pump stopping mode, 152
Motor heating, 143
Soft starting with torque control, 137
Soft starting with torque control and current
limiting, 142

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006 365
Index

Soft starting with voltage ramp, 134

Soft starting with voltage ramp and current
limiting, 140 W
Starting time monitoring, 181
Warnings and remedial measures, 250
Status and error displays, 248
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 250
Stopping modes, 146
3RW55 soft starter, 250
Alternative stopping, 163
Coasting down, 148
DC braking with external braking contactor, 154
Dynamic DC braking without contactor, 157
Pump stopping mode, 152
Reversing DC braking with a reversing contactor
assembly, 160
Torque control, 150
Voltage ramp, 149
Structure of the article number
3RW55 Failsafe soft starter, 47
3RW55 soft starter, 45
Suggested settings, 93
Switching frequency monitoring, 178
System monitoring
Condition monitoring, 174

T
Target group, 23
Test
Current acquisition, 264
Motor overload protection, 264
Test with small load, 222
Thermistor motor protection with temperature
sensor, 169
Torque control, 150
Trace function, 220
Trip class, 168
Tripping characteristic, 168

U
Use of PINs, 237
User account administration, 240, 242

V
Voltage ramp, 149

SIRIUS 3RW55 and 3RW55 Failsafe Soft Starters

366 Equipment Manual, 02/2022, A5E35630887002A/RS-AF/006